TVCC_CTE Project Manual 09.30.19 - BidNet

09.20.2019

650 COLLEGE BLVD ONTARIO, OREGON CAREER & TECHINICAL EDUCATION CENTER

TREASURE VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE

PERMIT SET EDA IN#: 07 01 07417

P

R

O

J

E

C

T

M

A

N

U

A

L

Volume 2 of 2 | Divisions 21-33

OWNER

Treasure Valley Community College

650 College Blvd

Ontario, OR 97914

541.881.8822

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER

CTA Architects Engineers 800 W. Main Ste. 800 Boise ID, 83702 208.336.4900 Contact: Amy Lindgren

TREASURE VALLEY COMMUNITY COLLEGE - CTE TVCC_CTE

ONTARIO, OR

�

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 2

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

NOTICE OF IMPROVEMENT

OREGON DOCUMENTS

INVITATION TO BID - STATE OF OREGON

EXHIBIT 1 - PRICE SUBMITTAL FORM

EXHIBIT 2 - BID BOND - STATE OF OREGON

EXHIBIT 3 - PERFORMANCE BOND - STATE OF OREGON

EXHIBIT 4 - PAYMENT BOND - STATE OF OREGON

EXHIBIT 5 - SAMPLE PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT AGREEMENT FORM

EXHIBIT 6 - GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT CONTRACTS -

STATE OF OREGON

EXHIBIT 7 - SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

EXHIBIT 8 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT COMPLIANCE CHECKLIST

EDA DOCUMENTS

DAVIS-BACON WAGE RATE

CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING LOWER TIER COVERED

TRANSACTIONS

NOTICE OF REQUIREMENTS FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL

EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY

EDA CONTRACTING PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

EDA PROJECT SIGN

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT - DATED 2/6/2019

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................ 1-4

012300 ALTERNATES ................................................................................................................... 1-2

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ..................................................................................... 1-4

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ................................................................................. 1-2

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .............................................................. 1-4

012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 1-4

013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ..................................................... 1-8

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 1-10

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 1-10

014200 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................... 1-2

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .............................................................. 1-8

017300 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 1-10

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .................................... 1-4

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ............................................................................................. 1-6

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................................................. 1-8

017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ................................................................................. 1-2


ONTARIO, OR

�

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2

017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ............................................................................ 1-6

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ............................................................................................. 1-8

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ...................................................................................... 1-16

033543 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING .............................................................................. 1-4

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY (NOT USED)

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ................................................................................. 1-8

053100 STEEL DECKING .............................................................................................................. 1-6

054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING .............................................................................. 1-8

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS ................................................................................................. 1-8

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY .................................................................... 1-4

061600 SHEATHING ...................................................................................................................... 1-4

064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS ................................... 1-8

066400 PLASTIC PANELING........................................................................................................ 1-4

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

070150.19 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING ................................................................................. 1-4

071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ................................................................................... 1-2

072100 THERMAL INSULATION ................................................................................................ 1-6

072419 WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) ... 1-10

072726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS ........................................................... 1-8

074213.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS ............................................................................... 1-10

074293 SOFFIT PANELS ............................................................................................................... 1-8

075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING .................................................. 1-14

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ...................................................................... 1-10

077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................................... 1-6

079200 JOINT SEALANTS .......................................................................................................... 1-12

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES .................................................................... 1-8

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS .................................................................................................... 1-6

083613 SECTIONAL DOORS ...................................................................................................... 1-10

084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ................................... 1-12

087100 DOOR HARDWARE ....................................................................................................... 1-34

088000 GLAZING ......................................................................................................................... 1-12

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ...................................................................... 1-6

092900 GYPSUM BOARD ............................................................................................................. 1-6

093013 CERAMIC TILING .......................................................................................................... 1-10

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .................................................................................. 1-8

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................................ 1-6

096813 TILE CARPETING ............................................................................................................. 1-8


ONTARIO, OR

�

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

097200 WALL COVERINGS ......................................................................................................... 1-6

099123 PAINTING .......................................................................................................................... 1-8

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101400 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE ...................................................................................................... 1-6

101423.16 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE ............................................................... 1-6

102113.13 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS .............................................................................. 1-6

102239 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS ..................................................................................... 1-8

102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION ................................................................................. 1-6

102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ....................................................... 1-6

104413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS ...................................................................................... 1-6

104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.................................................................................................... 1-4

108213 EXTERIOR GRILLES SCREENS ..................................................................................... 1-8

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES .......................................................................................... 1-6

123623.13 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS ............................................................. 1-6

DIVISION 13 - 20 (NOT USED)

VOLUME 2 OF 2

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

211313 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM........................................................................................... 1-22

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

220800 SERVICE HOT WATER COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS .................................. 1-8

221113 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION .............................................................................. 1-4

221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ........................................................................................... 1-6

221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES .................................................................. 1-8

221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS ........................................................................................... 1-4

221313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS ..................................................................................... 1-4

221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING ..................................................................... 1-10

221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES .................................................................. 1-6

221413 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING ........................................................................................... 1-8

221513 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING ....................................................... 1-6

223100 DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS .................................................................................. 1-6

223400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS .............................................................. 1-6

224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES .................................................................................................... 1-6

224500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES .......................................................................... 1-6

224700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS ................................................................................................ 1-4

DIVISION 23 - HVAC

230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC EQUIPMENT ............ 1-12

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC

EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................... 1-6

230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING ................................... 1-6

230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING ........................... 1-6


ONTARIO, OR

�

TABLE OF CONTENTS 4

230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................... 1-8

230548 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC .................................................. 1-6

230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ......... 1-4

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ............................................ 1-8

230700 PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION ....................................................................... 1-12

230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC .......................................................................................... 1-6

230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC .................................................. 1-20

230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS ............................................. 1-2

231123 NATURAL-GAS PIPING ................................................................................................ 1-10

232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING ................................................................................................... 1-4

233113 METAL DUCTS ............................................................................................................... 1-12

233116 NONMETAL DUCTS ........................................................................................................ 1-4

233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................ 1-10

233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS ...................................................................................... 1-6

233425 WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION SYSTEM ............................................................ 1-6

233533 LISTED KITCHEN VENTILATION SYSTEM EXHAUST DUCTS .............................. 1-6

233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES .................................................................... 1-4

233813 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS ................................................................................ 1-8

235100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS .................................................................. 1-4

237200 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 1-4

237400 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 1-8

238126 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS AND HEAT PUMPS ............................................ 1-4

238128 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AND SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING

UNITS ................................................................................................................................. 1-8

238239 ELECTRIC HEATERS ....................................................................................................... 1-4


DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260300 DEMOLITION / REMODEL ............................................................................................. 1-2

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ......................................................... 1-6

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ................. 1-8

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .................................. 1-8

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ...................................... 1-6

260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ........................................ 1-12

260548.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .................................................. 1-6

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ........................................................ 1-6

260573.13 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES ............................................................................................. 1-6

260573.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS ................................................................................ 1-8

260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES .................................................................................. 1-10

262416 PANELBOARDS ................................................................................................................ 1-6

262726 WIRING DEVICES .......................................................................................................... 1-10

262813 FUSES ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS .................................................. 1-6

263100 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS ................................................................................... 1-6

265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING ............................................................................................. 1-8

265219 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING ............................................................................ 1-8

265619 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING ............................................................................................ 1-8

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS


ONTARIO, OR

�

TABLE OF CONTENTS 5

270500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS ............................................ 1-4

271100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS ................................................ 1-6

271200 TVCC NETWORK CABLING SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................ 1-68

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY .......... 1-4

283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM .................................................................................. 1-16


DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

311000 SITE CLEARING ............................................................................................................... 1-2

312000 EARTH MOVING .............................................................................................................. 1-4

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 ASPHALT PAVING ......................................................................................................... 1-10

321313 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ....................................................................................... 1-10

321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS ................................................................................................. 1-2

328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION .............................................................................................. 1-16

329113 SOIL PREPARATION ..................................................................................................... 1-10

329200 TURF AND GRASSES ...................................................................................................... 1-8

329300 PLANTS ............................................................................................................................ 1-16

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES .............................................................. 1-6

334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING........................................................................... 1-4

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


ONTARIO, OR

�

TABLE OF CONTENTS 6

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


ONTARIO, OR

FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install an automatic sprinkler system to protect Treasure Valley Community

College, Career and Technical Education Center as indicated herein and as shown on the

preliminary working Plans. Connect system to a water supply of sufficient pressure to ensure

full and sustained water discharge immediately from sprinklers when opened by fire at rated

heat temperatures. Water supply shall conform to NFPA water supply requirements with

considerations given to the reliability of the public or private water supply, taking into account

probable minimum pressure conditions. The Contractor shall verify site water pressure before

submitting Working Plans.

B. All portions of the systems shall be installed in accordance with the preliminary working plans,

Details, and Specifications and as required by jurisdictional authorities and codes. The position

is taken that the Owner is entitled to a project which meets or exceeds the minimum

requirements of nationally recognized fire protection standards. All efforts and installations

shall be directed toward this end. Where there is conflict between the preliminary working plans

and/or Specifications, and the requirements of the jurisdictional authorities or codes, the conflict

shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer of Record at least ten (10) days prior to Bidding

or be resolved at no cost to the Owner. If the Contractor has not identified conflicts to the

Engineer of Record, he shall be responsible for complying with the most stringent code or

preliminary working drawing methods.

C. Substitution requests shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer of Record at least ten (10)

days prior to Bidding and shall conform to the instructions set forth in the Substitution

Procedures section of Division 01.

D. The intent of these Specifications is to describe the complete systems to be installed, including

minor details of work or materials not specifically mentioned or shown, but necessary for the

successful operation and completion of the installation.

E. Work to be performed under this Section shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Excavation, backfill and compaction for the fire sprinkler system supply within 5'-0" of

the building.

2. Automatic fire sprinkler systems:

a. Wet pipe flow switch system.

1) Pipe and fittings.

2) Hangers and supports.

3) Earthquake bracing.

4) Valves.

5) Alarms.

6) Flow and Tamper Switches.


ONTARIO, OR


7) Specialties.

b. Dry pipe system.

1) Pipe and fittings.

2) Hangers and supports.

3) Earthquake bracing.

4) Dry pipe Valves.

5) Alarms.

6) Pressure and Tamper Switches.

7) Air Compressor, Trim, and vibration dampening components.

8) Specialties.

F. The following areas shall be furnished with an automatic fire protection system of type or types

indicated or as required:

1. Entire Building: Wet systems

2. Overhangs/Canopies as described in the preliminary working plans: Dry System

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. All work performed under this Section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements

of both the General and Special Conditions.

B. Examine the complete bid document drawing set and the above referenced Specification parts

thoroughly before submitting a Proposal for accomplishment of work in this Section.

1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. The term jurisdictional authority used in this Section of the Specification shall include, as

applicable, but not be limited to the following:

1. Ontario Building Department.

2. Ontario Fire Marshal

3. Insurance Services Office or Insuring Authority Having Jurisdiction.

4. Owner.

B. The design and installation of all systems of fire protection shall conform to all requirements of

applicable codes and publications herein defined:

1. International Building Code (2015).

2. International Fire Code (2015)

3. Oregon Fire Code (2014)

4. NFPA 13 (2013)

5. NFPA 25 (2014)

6. NFPA 72 (2013)

7. All State and local ordinances.

8. Underwriters' Laboratories.

9. American Society of Testing Materials.


ONTARIO, OR


10. American National Standards Institute.

11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The successful Contractor shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of this

Specification. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special

Conditions of these Specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals.

1. The "Working plans" shall be submitted to the engineer for approval of intent of

"Preliminary Plans" per state of Oregon requirements.

B. Installer Reliability: The Installer shall possess a valid State of Oregon Fire Sprinkler

Contractor's license. The Installer shall have been actively and successfully engaged in the

installation of commercial automatic sprinkler systems for the past three years.

C. Materials and Equipment: All equipment and devices shall be of a make and type listed by UL,

FM, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for the specific purpose for which it is

used.

D. Submit Working Plans (Floor Plans - detailed Working Plans), showing dimensions, ducts,

lights, or other items affecting the fire protection systems to jurisdictional agencies for review

and approval. All items identified in NFPA 13 for proper Working Plans shall be complied

with. The Engineer of Record will reject all Submittals not in compliance. Submit all

necessary Working Plans to authorities having jurisdiction. Concurrently, six (6) sets shall be

sent to the Engineer of Record for review (alternately, an electronic submittal of to-scale

Working Plans will be acceptable). After approvals from jurisdictional agencies have been

returned to the Contractor, they shall be submitted to the Engineer of Record for final

acceptance. These final acceptance sets shall have all agencies' stamps of review and

acceptance.

E. Working Plans shall be prepared in AutoCAD, Revit, or compatible software.

F. The Engineer of Record's review will be for general location only. It will be the Contractor's

responsibility to check all drawings for interferences and to do shop fabrication from

measurements taken at the job site.

G. Work on the Project shall not begin until Plans have been reviewed by the Engineer of Record.

H. Six (6) sets of full catalog information shall be submitted for approval for all materials intended

for use on this Project (alternately, an electronic submittal of to-scale Working Plans will be

acceptable). Catalog information indicating more than one item shall be highlighted to clearly

indicate the proposed equipment.

I. Record Drawings required per paragraph 1.6 and Operation and Maintenance Manuals required

per paragraph 1.7 shall be submitted for approval.

J. Prepare detailed Working Plans that are signed by a NICET Level III, Level IV Sprinkler

Technician or a Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection

Engineering. As the Working Drawing and Calculation review is for technical adequacy only,


ONTARIO, OR


the installer remains responsible for correcting any conflicts with other trades and building

construction that arise during installation. Partial Submittals will not be accepted. Material

Submittals shall be approved prior to purchase or delivery to the job site. Suitably bind

Submittals in notebooks or binders and provide index referencing the appropriate Specification

Section. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Qualifications:

a. Provide a copy of the installing Contractor's fire sprinkler state Contractor's

license.

b. Provide a copy of the NICET certification for the NICET Level III, Level IV

Sprinkler Technician who prepared and signed the detailed Working Plans or the

Oregon License number of the Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the

field of Fire Protection Engineering.

2. Hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 and with design information given

on the preliminary working plans and in the specifications.

K. Manufacturer's Data Sheets: Provide for materials and equipment proposed for use on the

system. Include listing information and installation instructions in data sheets. Where data

sheet describes items in addition to that item being submitted, clearly identify proposed item on

the sheet.

L. Re-submittals: A summary of submittal changes will be required for each re-submittal. This

summary should briefly reiterate the original comment and give specific direction on how the

issue was resolved. Changes made that are not a result of submittal review comments shall be

clearly identified in this summary as well.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall investigate the structural, mechanical, electrical, and finished conditions

affecting the piping, and shall arrange the equipment accordingly; furnish required fittings,

offsets and accessories. Route fire protection piping to avoid interference with duct work and

drain piping. In the event it becomes necessary to make field changes in pipe locations due to

building construction, the Contractor shall consult with the Engineer of Record before making

any changes. Any such changes required shall be made without added cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper locations and type of inserts

for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for fire protection

work, and shall obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress to avoid

delay of the work.

C. All fees and permits specifically required for fire protection work, not obtained by others as

specified elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by this Contractor.

D. All systems of fire protection shall be installed by a licensed (for the location of installation)

Fire Protection Contractor, fully experienced in fire protection installation as specified herein.

Fire Protection Contractors may be required to provide in writing, specific information as to

successfully completed projects and references to show cause as to why they should be

considered acceptable to the Engineer of Record.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Fire protection system shutdowns shall be coordinated and implemented by the Contractor as

preplanned impairments per NFPA 25 Chapter 15 and its related Annexes. Where any fire

protection system will be placed out of service for more than 10 hours in a 24-hour period, an

approved fire watch shall be provided until the system is restored to normal working order.

Impairments shall be coordinated with the Owner and other trades to minimize conflict and

inconvenience.

1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. One approved set of preliminary working plans and one set of Working Plans shall be

maintained on the job at all times.

B. One set of "As-Built" Drawings shall be kept on the job at all times. "As-Built" Drawings shall

be kept current daily. "As-Built" Drawings shall be available at all times to Engineer of Record

for review and use.

C. One reproducible set of "As-Built" Drawings shall be provided to the Engineer of Record upon

completion of the work.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Three (3) sets of operating and maintenance instructions shall be provided to the Owner upon

completion. Manuals shall include, as a minimum, the following:

1. "As-Built" Drawings.

2. Revised hydraulic calculations based on "As-Built" Drawings.

3. Catalog cut sheets of all materials installed.

4. Equipment maintenance manuals.

5. Contractor's Material and Test Certificates.

6. Certification of Owner Training.

7. Contractor Guarantee and Warranty.

8. "As-Built" AutoCAD drawing (.dwg) file or equal on CD disk.

B. One (1) factory-bound edition of NFPA 25 shall be provided to the Owner.

1.8 TRAINING

A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation of the systems.

Instruction shall continue until the Owner is fully satisfied that he understands the operation of

his system.

B. Contractor shall obtain Owner's dated signature that all training has been accomplished and is

acceptable to the Owner.


ONTARIO, OR


1.9 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall guarantee to the Owner in writing, all equipment and

workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the fire protection system has been placed in

continuous service and has been accepted by all authorities having jurisdiction.

B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall not be held responsible for improper or negligent

maintenance by the Owner after operating and maintenance indoctrination has been given to the

Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRINKLERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Tyco.

2. Victaulic.

3. Viking.

4. Reliable.

B. Install sprinklers from reviewed Working Plans.

C. All sprinklers shall be of similar design and from a single manufacturer.

D. The operating temperature of sprinklers shall be as required by the specific location of

installation.

E. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used unless specified in the preliminary working

plans.

F. Sprinklers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13, as indicated in the preliminary

working plans, and as follows:

1. Brass upright or pendent may be used in all attic, mechanical, storage or other non-public

spaces.

2. Recessed shall be used in all finished areas, offices, patient rooms, etc. unless otherwise

noted.

3. Where surface mounted obstructions will not allow for recessed installation, two-piece

escutcheons may be used to extend sprinklers to a maximum deflector distance as

allowed by NFPA or U.L. listing with prior approval of the architect.

4. Sidewall sprinklers may be used in accordance with listing and jurisdictional

requirements.

5. All sprinklers shall be quick-response glass bulb type when applicable.

6. Dry pendent sprinklers shall be used in all areas subject to freezing when the sprinklers

are supplied from a heated area wet system.

7. Dry pendent sprinklers shall be used in Dry Pipe systems, Preaction systems, etc. per

NFPA 13.


ONTARIO, OR


8. Sprinklers with deflectors less than 7'-6" above the finished floor shall have sprinkler

guards.

9. Sprinklers located below grated mezzanines shall be of the intermediate level type with

water shields and guards.

10. Pendent sprinklers in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and janitor closets shall have

sprinkler guards.

G. Escutcheons for seismic areas shall be oversized expansion plate type to allow 1 inch clearance.

2.2 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS


1. FlexHead Industries, Inc.

2. VicFlex Victaulic.

B. Flexible sprinkler hose fittings for use in commercial suspended and gypsum board ceilings

may be used as a contractors' option to hard pipe armover and drops per NFPA and installed per

the manufacturers' listing.

C. All flexible sprinkler hose fittings shall be UL listed and FM approved.

D. Provide flexible hose assemblies and end fittings with 100 percent Type 304 Stainless steel,

with a 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Flexible hose assemblies shall be fully welded non

mechanical fittings, braided, leak tested with minimum 1 inch true bore internal corrugated hose

diameter.

E. Flexible hose assemblies shall have G90 galvanized steel ceiling bracket, direct attachment

type, having integrated snap on clip ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper re-

sistant screws. Provide flexible hose attachment with removable hub type with set screw.

2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS-INTERIOR

A. Interior piping for automatic sprinkler system shall conform to NFPA 13 and as follows:

1. Pipe and fittings shall be products manufactured in the United States of America.

2. Wet system sprinkler piping above ground with threaded fittings shall be Schedule 40,

Eddy-Thread, Mega-Thread, or equal black steel pipe with a corrosion resistance rating

equal to or greater than 1.0. Threaded thinwall pipe with a CRR less than 1.0 shall not be

used.

3. Fittings for threaded and coupled pipe shall consist of cast iron, ductile iron, or malleable

threaded fittings joined with Teflon tape thread sealing compound or pipe joint

compound. Pressure rating of fittings shall be as required for application.

4. Wet system sprinkler piping above ground with grooved fittings for sizes 2-1/2-inch and

larger shall be roll grooved Schedule 10, Eddy-Flow, Mega-Flow, or equal black steel

pipe with a corrosion resistance rating equal to or greater than 1.0

5. Fittings for grooved end pipe shall consist of Tyco Grinnell Series ductile iron or equal

ductile iron couplings and fittings in accordance with NFPA 13. Gaskets shall be as

recommended by the manufacturer for the application.


ONTARIO, OR


6. All above ground dry or preaction sprinkler systems piping 2-inch and smaller shall be

galvanized Schedule 40 pipe and hot dipped galvanized threaded fittings. Sizes 2-1/2-

inch and larger shall be roll grooved galvanized Schedule 10 pipe. Fittings shall be

galvanized or painted. Grooved pipe couplings shall be painted. Grooved pipe gasket

type and lubrication shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the application.

7. Dry system pipe that is field roll grooved shall be cleaned, prepped, and cold galvanized

before installation. Preparation and application of cold galvanized finish shall be per the

finish manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Fittings for plain end pipe shall not be used.

C. Mechanical Outlet or Strap Outlet type fittings shall not be used in new system installations.

D. CPVC piping shall not be used.

E. Alternate piping systems approved by NFPA 13 may be allowed with prior approval of the

Engineer of Record.

F. All piping shall be identified with pre-manufactured piping identification labels.

G. All drain piping and fittings shall be galvanized.

H. All Fire Department Connection piping and fittings up-stream of check valve shall be

galvanized.

I. All wet system sprinkler pipe shall be supplied with a factory-applied antibacterial coating.

Antibacterial coating shall be proven to minimize the effects of Microbiologically Influenced

Corrosion (MIC) and shall be compatible with all system components.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Space pipe hangers in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. Construct hangers,

hanger rods, inserts and clamps as approved by the same.

2.5 EARTHQUAKE BRACING

A. Furnish and install all earthquake bracing as required by NFPA 13, Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Owner's insurer, and as follows:

1. Seismic Coefficient (Cp) force factor requirements are provided and shown on the

preliminary working plans.

2. In structures of seismic design categories D the requirements for the hangers and piping

shall follow the requirements of ASCE standard 7-10.

3. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-

restraint device materials and installation.

4. Seismic expansion loops shall be Metraflex or equal with a minimum of 4" of movement

listed for fire sprinkler systems.


ONTARIO, OR


2.6 VALVES


1. Mueller.

2. Kennedy.

3. Nibco.

4. Tyco.

5. AGF.

6. United Brass.

7. Victaulic.

8. Watts.

B. Gate valves shall be approved indicating type as required by NFPA 13. Check valves shall be

as required by NFPA 13. Test and drain valves shall be approved brass globe, angle, or ball

valves. Locate sprinkler system isolation valves as shown on the drawings and as required per

NFPA 13 complete with a tamper alarm switch.

C. Interior:

1. Interior Gate:

a. Make: Nibco.

b. Sizes: 2-1/2 inches, 3 inches, 4 inches, 6 inches and 8 inches.

c. Ends: Flanged.

d. Model: F-607-OTS.

2. Interior Butterfly:

a. Make: Tyco

b. Sizes: 2-1/2 inches through 10 inches.

c. Ends: Grooved.

d. Model: BFV-N

Note: Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of OS&Y valves at the Contractor's option

for 2-1/2 inches and larger valves. Exception: Suction side of Fire Pumps shall be OS&Y

valves.

3. Interior Butterfly (Normally Closed):

a. Make: Victaulic

b. Sizes: 2 inches through 8 inches.

c. Ends: Grooved.

d. Model: FireLock 707C

4. Ball Valve:

a. Make: Watts

b. Sizes: 1/4-inch to 2 inches.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Model: WBV


ONTARIO, OR


5. Check Valves:

a. Make: Tyco

b. Sizes: 2-1/2 inches, 3 inches, 4 inches and 6 inches.

c. Ends: Grooved.

d. Model: CV-1F.

6. Drain Valves Interior:

a. Make: United Brass

b. Sizes: 1/2-inch through 2 inches.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Model: 125 SUL

7. Test N Drain:

a. Make: AGF.

b. Sizes: 1 inch through 2 inches.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Model: 1011, 1000, and 1011T.

2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES


1. Febco.

2. Ames.

3. Watts.

B. Install new backflow prevention devices as required by the Water Authority Having

Jurisdiction.

C. Devices shall be UL or FM approved.

D. Hydraulic flow rate shall fall below the UL Tested flow rate of the device.

E. All reduced pressure backflow prevention devices shall be provided with an air gap drain with

splash guard and piped to the exterior or adequate floor drain with galvanized pipe and fittings.

2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS


1. Potter Roemer.

2. Croker.

B. Furnish and install where shown on Plans and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction fire

department connections, complete with clapper, plugs and chains.

C. Finish shall consist of (Rough Brass).


ONTARIO, OR


D. Fire department connections shall be set 2 feet 6 inches above grade.

E. Connections for sprinkler system shall be indexed "auto spkr". The indexing shall be "cast in"

by the manufacturer. Required indexing shall be permanently installed directly above the

connection.

F. Connection shall be a two-way inlet complete with interior single swing clapper, brass plugs,

and chain and shall have threads to meet the local fire department requirements. Provide an

automatic ball-drip piped to exterior with galvanized pipe.

G. Number of outlets shall be provided to allow a maximum of 250 GPM per inlet of combined

fire sprinkler and inside hose stream demands.

2.9 SPECIALTIES

A. Fire Seals:

1. Where piping passes through walls, floors or other building construction which by code

requires a fire rating, approved fire rated assemblies shall be used. Proposed protection

shall be submitted for approval. Plans shall clearly indicate details and locations of

required protection.

B. Escutcheon Plates:

1. Where exposed piping passes through finish work, chrome plated wall plates or other

wall plate finishes acceptable to the Engineer of Record, shall be installed. All wall plates

shall be metal.

2. Split wall plates or escutcheons shall only be used in remodel projects. Split wall plates

or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snugly around piping. All wall plates shall be

metal.

3. Solid galvanized wall plates shall be used at both sides of all exterior walls.

C. Valve Identification:

1. All valves within the building shall have permanently marked identification signs

provided in accordance with NFPA 13 standards. Signs shall be manufactured and not

hand written. Signs shall be hung with galvanized or chrome chain.

D. Spare Sprinkler Supply:

1. Furnish and install a supply of extra sprinklers of each type and degree link installed in

the project, complete with mountable cabinet. Mount cabinet on wall next to sprinkler

entry; provide wrenches for each type of sprinkler installed in cabinet. Provide a list of

all sprinklers installed throughout the property in the spare sprinkler cabinet as required

by NFPA 13.

E. Piping Identification:

1. All piping shall be identified at 40' maximum spacing and a minimum of one

identification label per room. Labels shall be Seton wrap around style or equal.


ONTARIO, OR


2.10 WET SYSTEM RISER MANIFOLD


1. Tyco

2. Viking

3. Reliable

B. Install Riser manifold complete with necessary integral test and drain valve with test orifice,

and pressure relief valve where shown on the drawings. Assembly shall have an integral flow

switch with contacts for wiring to the fire alarm system.

C. The manifold shall be ductile iron and finished in corrosion resistant red paint.

D. The manifold shall be UL listed and FM approved.

E. A Tyco CV-1F check valve shall be provided at the base of each wet system riser manifold.

Ensure adequate distance between check valve and waterflow alarm switch per switch

manufacturer's installation instructions.

2.11 DRY PIPE VALVE


1. Tyco

2. Viking

3. Reliable

B. Install dry pipe valve complete with necessary drain valves, pressure switches, check valves,

etc., as required by NFPA 13 where shown on the drawings. Assembly shall have pressure

switch with contacts for wiring to the fire alarm system.

C. Provide low air alarm switch and pressure flow switch.

D. Fire sprinkler sub-contractor shall coordinate all electrical requirements with Fire Alarm (Divi-

sion 28) and Electrical (Division 26) requirements and with the fire alarm and electrical contrac-

tors.

2.12 FORWARD FLOW TEST HEADER


1. Potter Roemer (5800 series). Wall plate 5900 series style (custom engraved - "Backflow

Test outlet").

2. Croker (6610 series). Wall plate 6700 series style (custom engraved - "Backflow Test

outlet").

B. Furnish and install where shown on plans.

C. Set test connections 3 feet above exterior grade or as required by the Fire Marshal.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Provide custom brass finish plate indicating "Forward Flow Test" and Caps with Chains.

2.13 ELECTRICAL DEVICES

A. All electrical devices shall be coordinated with Electrical (Division 26) and Fire Alarm (Section

283100) requirements for compatibility of voltages and manufacturer.

B. Tamper Switch:

1. Potter OSYSU-2.

2. Potter PCVS-2.

3. Potter RBVS.

C. Flow Switch:

1. Potter VSR.

2. Potter VSR-S.

D. Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch:

1. Potter PS10-2A.

E. Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch:

1. Potter PS40-2A.

F. Air Maintenance Device:

1. General Air Products AMD-1

G. Air Compressor:

1. General Air Products OL Series (riser mounted)

2. Provide with manufacturer's air compressor manufacturer's Magnetic line starter.

3. Provide with manufacturer's vibration isolation attachments and flexible hose assembly.

H. Audio/Visual Alarm Indicating Appliances:

1. Audio/Visual units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and

visual alarm devices. The housing shall be designed to accommodate either horns, bells,

or chimes. The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, Pyramidal shaped lens

with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180 degree field of view. Integral Xenon strobe shall

provide a minimum light output of 4.5 candela at 24VDC at a 45 flashes per minute rate.

Xenon strobes shall provide a 4-wire connection to insure properly supervised in/out

system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware including

backbox.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


ONTARIO, OR


3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Working Plan Information: Provide working plans, calculations, materials, equipment,

installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the

requirements of NFPA 13 and the following:

1. Recommendations in annexes shall be treated as requirements.

2. Sprinkler Protection: To determine spacing and sizing, apply the following coverage

classifications:

a. See occupancy design table and notes on the preliminary working plans.

b. Request clarification from the Architect for any hazard classification not identified.

3. Perform hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 utilizing the Area/Density

method. Provide a hydraulic placard for each zone, occupancy hazard, and each floor of

the building minimum.

4. The room design method is not allowed unless indicated in the preliminary working

plans.

5. Quick response sprinkler reductions are not allowed unless indicated on the preliminary

working plans.

6. Minimum design areas shall be 1500 sf, including residential sprinkler designs unless

otherwise indicated on the preliminary working plans.

7. Flexible sprinkler assemblies shall be included in hydraulic calculations using the UL

listing equivalent length of Schedule 40, nominal 1 inch diameter pipe, with a minimum

of 4 bends.

8. Hydraulic calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall no less than

10 psi below the available water supply curve.

9. Velocities shall not exceed 20 feet per second in any pipe.

10. Water Supply: Base water supply on a flow test as indicated on the preliminary working

plans.

B. The preliminary working plans indicate approximate locations of sprinklers and conceptual

routing of piping. Final spacing and layout is the responsibility of this contractor and final

approval of the layout and routing is to be by the Engineer of Record.

C. The fire protection system supplier shall design the piping to supply the system. Piping shall be

laid out so as not to interfere with the installation of other piping, ductwork, light fixtures, or

equipment.

D. The entire sprinkler system is not shown on Plans. The intent is to provide complete sprinkler

systems as required. This Contractor shall be responsible for surveying the site, existing

construction, new construction, and the complete contract document set and prepare Working

Plans for the total system.

E. All piping shall be run concealed wherever possible. Where piping is run exposed, special

notation on Contractor's Working Plans to that effect shall be evident and conspicuous on the

Working Plans. Any piping determined to be a problem shall be relocated at no cost to the

Owner.

F. System piping to be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13 Chapter 22 (2010).


ONTARIO, OR


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish sprinkler system with the following components:

1. Systems shall be equipped with a supervised isolation valve and an approved flow alarm

connected to the building fire alarm system.

2. A Fire Department Connection shall be installed on the system side of the water supply

check valve complete with its own check valve and ball drip.

3. A main drain shall be installed on each riser or sectional zone control valve and shall

drain to the exterior or to an adequate drain connection.

4. Auxiliary drains shall be provided when a change in piping direction prevents drainage of

sections of branch lines or mains through the main drain valve.

5. A test pipe of not less than 1 inch diameter terminating in an orifice equivalent to one

sprinkler shall be provided for each system or sectional zone.

6. Exterior alarm shall be installed as near as practical to Fire Department Connection with

identification sign. Exterior horn/strobe shall be wired to alarm system.

B. Installation shall be accomplished by the licensed Contractor. Provide a qualified technician,

experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being installed, to supervise

the installation and testing of the system.

C. Delivery, storage, and handling of materials to and on the construction site shall be consistent

with good practices, manufacturers' requirements, and the following procedures. Components

shall be protected from moisture, dirt, and debris. Storage shall be elevated above grade and

protected from damage. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Deliver piping

and valves with protective caps installed; if removal of protection is required for inspection,

reinstall for storage. Store piping in a manner to prevent sagging or bending. CPVC or other

plastic piping shall be protected from direct sunlight. Any deficiencies discovered in the

delivery, storage, or handling of materials shall be recorded and remedied immediately in such a

way as to minimize damage and preserve the integrity of the system and components.

D. Installation of Piping:

1. Ensure the ends of all sprinkler system pipes are smooth and free of any burrs or fins. To

help reduce the potential for accelerated internal pipe corrosion of longitudinally welded

black steel pipe, install such pipe with the weld line rotated at least 45 degree in

relationship to the floor (for reference, the weld line points at the floor at 0 degree).

2. Dry and preaction systems: Internally and externally cold galvanize all threaded and roll

grooved ends cut in the field. Properly clean the pipe per manufacturer's instruction

before applying the finish.

3. Accurately cut pipe to measurements established by the installer and work into place

without springing or forcing. In any situations where bending of the pipe is required, use

a standard pipe-bending template.

4. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel

pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

5. Install concealed piping in spaces that have finished ceilings. Pipe installed near

equipment shall not block or encroach on equipment access or impede maintenance.

Where ceiling mounted equipment exists, install sprinklers so as not to obstruct the

movement or operation of the equipment or block access. Sidewall sprinklers may need

to be utilized.


ONTARIO, OR


6. Locate piping in stairways as near to the ceiling as possible to prevent tampering by

unauthorized personnel, and to provide a minimum headroom clearance of seven feet six

inches. To prevent an obstruction to egress, provide piping clearances in accordance with

NFPA 101.

7. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus,

and equipment having NPS 2-1/2" and larger end connections.

8. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for

water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

9. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged.

10. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials

of both piping systems.

E. Installation of Valves:

1. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2" and smaller.

2. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment

arranged to allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without

system shutdown. Provide separate support where necessary.

3. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.

4. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Welding: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.

G. Drains: Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones attached

to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under maximum

pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge into sinks.

Install drum drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13. Locations of drains

shall be indicated on shop and as-built drawings. A map of all drain locations shall be

permanently affixed to a visible location near the fire riser to aid in their identification.

H. Waterflow Alarm Switches: Install waterflow switch and adjacent valves in easily accessible

locations.

I. Inspector's Test Connection: Install and supply in conformance with NFPA 13, locate in a

secured area, and discharge to the exterior of the Building.

J. Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and

non-threaded pipe connections to the respective waterflow switch or pipe connection near to the

pipe from where they were cut.

K. Sleeves: Provide for pipes passing through masonry or concrete Schedule 10 pipe. Provide

space between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. Seal this space with a UL

Listed through penetration fire stop material per UL assembly listings.


ONTARIO, OR


L. Seals: Seal all interior fire rated wall penetrations with fire caulk. Seal all exterior wall

penetrations with fire calk or foam insulation and silicone sealing to maintain the fire rating and

thermal/moisture integrity of the wall system.

M. Provide pressure gauge at each water flow alarm switch location, riser or feed main, at each

sprinkler test connection at the top of each standpipe, at the inlet side of all double check or

reduced pressure backflow assembly, and at each main drain connection. Include pressure

gages with connection not less than NPS ¼" and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged

for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where

they are not subject to freezing.

N. Provide a pressure relief valve at each system riser or zone riser as required.

O. For each fire department connection, provide the symbolic sign given in NFPA 170 and locate 8

to 10 feet above each connection location. Size sign 18 by 18 inches with the symbol being at

least 14 by 14 inches.

P. Securely attach identification signs and tags to control valves, drain valves, and test valves.

Locate hydraulic placard information signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone

water flow switch. A map of any isolation valves installed in the building at locations other

than on the fire riser in the riser room shall be permanently affixed to a visible location near the

fire riser to aid in their identification.

Q. Repair damage to the building or equipment resulting from the installation of the sprinkler

system by the installer at no additional expense to the Owner.

R. Where details of installation are not given, the installation shall be made using manufacturer's

recommended practices or at the direction of the Engineer of Record. Coordinate draft-curtains

with the General contractor as required for application specific combustible concealed

sprinklers and application specific attic sprinklers.

S. This Contractor shall complete the fire protection systems ready for operation, in all respects, as

soon as possible. When system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the

system for its intended use. After system has been activated for continuous use, water charges

will be paid by the Owner.

T. This Contractor shall remove from the building all rubbish and unused materials due to or

connected with this installation. This contractor is responsible for proper removal and disposal

of all demolition items, as indicated on the plans or no longer required for a complete

operational system, in conformance with the Division 01 - General Requirements.

U. All piping and components shall be cleaned and left ready for painting in good condition and

free of damage, leakage, and corrosion.

3.3 TESTING

A. This Contractor shall call for inspection and complete Contractor's Material and Test

Certificates per NFPA 13 Chapter 10 "Underground Piping", Chapter 24 (2010) "Systems

Acceptance". The Forms shall be signed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.


ONTARIO, OR


B. The backflow device shall be forward flow tested per NFPA 13 Chapter 24 (2010) "Systems

Acceptance".

C. The entire sprinkler system shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig pressure for a

period of not less than two (2) hours with no pressure drop in the system.

D. The underground fire service main shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig

pressure for a period of not less than two (2) hours with + or - 5 psi pressure drop in the system

maximum per NFPA 24. Coordinate these requirements with the general contractor.

E. All testing shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer of Record or Owner.

F. Where jurisdictional authority's or NFPA 13 standards are more stringent than the above test,

they shall prevail.


ONTARIO, OR



ONTARIO, OR


END OF SECTION 21 1313


ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

SERVICE HOT WATER COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 220800 - 1

SECTION 220800 - SERVICE HOT WATER COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The purpose of this Section is to specify the Division 22 responsibilities and participation in the

commissioning process.

B. Organization of the commissioning program is primarily the responsibility of the Commissioning

Authority. Execution of the program is primarily the responsibility of the Contractor with support

from the Division 22 Subcontractor.

C. Division 22 Contractor shall cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in the following

manner:

1. Allow sufficient time before final completion dates so that installation verification, start-

up, test, adjust and balance, controls point-to-point checkout, system check-out and

functional testing can be accomplished for all needed equipment. Tasks need to be shown

on project schedule.

2. Participate as needed in the Controls Summit meeting.

3. Participate as needed in the Lighting Summit meeting.

4. Complete startup of the plumbing equipment and systems. Provide copies of completed

manufactures startup forms or Commissioning Authority provided system check-out forms

5. Assistance in testing, adjusting and balancing back check.

6. Complete and endorse all system readiness forms provided by the Commissioning

Authority to assure that Division 22 equipment and systems are fully operational and ready

for functional testing.

7. Assemble a copy of all records of Code Authority inspections and approvals to be

submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

8. Providing qualified personnel to operate equipment and systems as required to assist the

Commissioning Authority with functional testing to verify performance of

equipment/system.

9. Providing equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during

the commissioning process which fulfill contract and warranty requirements. Deficiencies

need to be corrected without undue delay.

10. Put all plumbing systems and equipment into full operation, and continue the operation of

the same during each working day of commissioning.

11. Provide operation and maintenance information and as-built drawings so that they can be

used during functional testing and training.

12. Providing training for the systems specified in Division 22 with coordination of Owner by

the Contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF COMMISSIONING

A. The following are to be commissioned:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Domestic Hot Water

B. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as requiring

commissioning.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract documents.

B. Division 01 Specification Sections applicable to related scope of work outlined above.

C. Division 22 Specification Sections identify the requirements for plumbing systems relating to the

installation of plumbing equipment and systems, particularly with respect to equipment and

system testing, start-up and performance demonstration/observation.

1.4 TERMS

A. Acceptable Performance: A component or system being able to meet specified design parameters

under actual load, including satisfactory documented completion of all functional performance

tests, and resolution of outstanding issues.

B. Commissioning Authority: A dedicated commissioning group certified to perform

commissioning activities and hired to verify that the systems achieve acceptable performance.

The person performing the testing of the system. This person is knowledgeable in the systems

being tested.

C. Commissioning Team: The term used to define the overall group associated with performing

commissioning work, including designated representatives of the Owner, Facilities Staff, Design

Professionals, Construction Team, and the Commissioning Authority.

D. Construction Team: The term used to define the overall group responsible for performing the

work required to comply with the Contract Documents, including the Construction Manager,

Contractor, the Mechanical Contractor and associated subcontractors, the Electrical Contractor

and associates subcontractors.

E. Design Intent: The ideas and documentation behind design decisions that were made to meet the

Owner's project requirements. The design intent describes the systems, components, conditions

and methods to provide a fully functioning building.

F. Functional Performance Testing: Full range of checks, tests and demonstrations carried out to

determine that all components, sub-systems, systems, and interfaces between the systems

function in accordance with the Contract Documents. In this context, function includes all modes

and sequences of control and operation, all interlocks and conditional control responses, and all

specified responses to abnormal emergency conditions.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor will provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial

checkout and required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will

NOT become the property of Owner.

B. Calibration Tolerances: The Contractor will provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and

accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not

otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply:

1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to

accuracy of 1 deg F and resolution of ± 0.5 deg F.

2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of ± 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full

range of meter), calibrated within the last year.

3. Calibration: According to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or

damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection.

C. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific

to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to

accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part

of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the

property of Owner.

D. Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of

equipment that is required for Functional Tests will be provided by the Contractor or

Commissioning Authority and will not become the property of the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor and Contractors shall be responsible for performing all procedures presented in

the specification and contract drawings, unless otherwise specified. The Commissioning Agent

will witness system start up and functional performance for all systems listed in this Division.

3.2 WORK PRIOR TO FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. A commissioning plan will be developed by the Commissioning Authority and approved by the

Owner's Representative.

1. Division 22 is obligated to assist the Commissioning Authority in preparing the

commissioning plan by providing all necessary information pertaining to the actual

equipment and installation.

2. If system modifications/clarifications are called for in the contractual requirements of this

and related Sections of work, they will be made at no additional cost to the Owner.


ONTARIO, OR


3. If Contractor-initiated system changes have been made that alter the commissioning

process, the Contractor will notify the Owner's Representative for approval.

B. Specific responsibilities of Division 22 are as follows:

1. Participate in any efforts to finalize sequences of operations with Owner, Designers, and

Commissioning Authority. The schedule should allow sufficient time before final

completion dates so that installation verification, start-up, test, adjust and balance, controls

point-to-point checkout, system check-out and functional testing can be accomplished for

all needed equipment. Tasks need to be shown on project schedule

2. Normal start-up services required to bring each system and sub-system into a fully

operational state per the contract documents and related directives, clarifications, change

orders, etc. This includes motor rotational check, cleaning, filling, purging, control

sequences of operation, leak testing, full-load and part-load performance, etc.

3. Collect and provide to the Commissioning Authority specification required documentation

as requested and outlined in the Commissioning Field Notebook.

4. Review the Commissioning Field Notebook, Commissioning Plan, Project Communication

Reports, and Issues Resolution Log and submit comments to the Commissioning Authority

as needed.

5. Provide equipment submittals for systems to be commissioned to the Commissioning

Authority.

6. Provide Commissioning Authority with controls system wiring diagrams and narrative

sequences of operation in time for use in preparing the functional test procedures.

7. Participate as needed in the Controls Summit meeting.

8. Participate as needed in the Lighting Summit meeting.

9. Participate in commissioning meetings with the Commissioning Authority.

10. Provide preliminary TAB report, indicating all actual field values recorded, field notes, and

outstanding deficiencies, to the Commissioning Authority prior to initiation of back

checking of TAB work. These reports shall be incorporated in the Commissioning Field

Notebook. Assistance in testing, adjusting and balancing back check.

11. Complete and endorse all system readiness forms provided by the Commissioning

Authority to assure that Division 22 equipment and systems are fully operational and ready

for functional testing.

12. Provide schedule of activities, forms, and other documentation to the Commissioning

Authority and Owner's Representative at least two (2) weeks minimum prior to any startup

or testing required by the Contract Documents.

13. Assemble a copy of all records of Code Authority inspections and approvals to be

submitted to the Commissioning Authority. Place documentation in Commissioning Field

Notebook.

14. Issue System Readiness form for each set of equipment to the Commissioning Authority

upon completion of all component installation, start-up documentation, system work and

testing requirements per specification for all Contractors.

15. Provide qualified personnel for participation in site inspections, commissioning tests,

including seasonal testing required and warranty end testing required after the initial

commissioning.

16. Provide engineering and technical expertise to oversee and direct the correction of

deficiencies found during the commissioning process. This includes providing equipment,

materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during the commissioning

process which fulfill contract and warranty requirements. Deficiencies need to be corrected

without undue delay.


ONTARIO, OR


17. Put all plumbing systems and equipment into full operation, and continue the operation of

the same during each working day of commissioning.

18. Note any inconsistencies or deficiencies in system operations and enforce system

compliance or recommend to the Commissioning Authority, Owner's Representative and

A/E modifications to system design, which will enhance system performance.

19. In the event that a functional test fails, the cause of failure shall be determined and rectified

as soon as possible, and then retested. If more than two functional tests of the same

system(s) are required, all costs for additional testing may be borne by the Contractor, at

the Owner's discretion.

20. Operate equipment and systems, as required, for functional performance testing. This

includes, but is not limited to; manipulating the appropriate controls systems to achieve the

expected response for the functional test procedure.

21. Participate in the fine-tuning or troubleshooting of system performance if either of these

measures becomes necessary.

22. Review operation and maintenance information and as-build drawings provided by the

various subcontractors and vendors for verification, organization, and distribution. Report

any discrepancies to Commissioning Authority and the Owner's Representative.

23. Submit complete operation and maintenance information, and as-built drawings in

electronic form to the Commissioning Authority for review. (PDF preferred)

24. Obtain all documentation from completed installation audit forms, startup forms, and

functional performance tests and assemble the components in the Commissioning Field

Notebook and submit the completed notebook to the Commissioning Authority for review

and approval.

25. Oversee and provide training for the systems specified in all specification Divisions with

coordination by the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors.

26. Provide documentation of training for the systems specified.

C. Factory start-up services for key equipment and systems specified in Division 22. The Division

22 Contractor shall coordinate this work with the manufacturer and the Commissioning

Authority.

D. The Contractor will not begin the functional testing until each system is completely installed and

system readiness form has been approved by the Commissioning Authority.

1. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. The Commissioning

Authority will not begin the functional testing process until each system is complete and

documented. If possible, testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems and/or

sub-systems if expediting this work is in the best interests of the Owner. Testing prior to

system completion will have a cost impact. Start of functional testing before system

completion will not relieve Division 22 from completing those systems as per the schedule.

2. Red-lined as-built drawings shall be available during commissioning.

3.3 PARTICIPATION IN FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Provide skilled technicians to start-up and debug all systems within the Division 22 work

(particularly with controls equipment). These same technicians shall be made available to assist

the Commissioning Authority in completing the commissioning program as it relates to each

system and their technical specialty. Work schedules, time required for testing, etc., will be

requested by the Commissioning Authority and coordinated by the Contractor. Contractor will


ONTARIO, OR


ensure the qualified technician(s) are available and present during the agreed upon schedules, and

of sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and/or problem resolutions.

1. The Commissioning Authority reserves the right to judge the appropriateness and

qualifications of the technicians relative to each item of equipment, system, and/or sub-

system. Qualifications of technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific

equipment involved, adequate documentation and tools to service/commission the

equipment, and an attitude/willingness to work with the Commissioning Authority to get

the job done. A liaison or intermediary between the Commissioning Authority with a

qualified factory representative does not constitute the availability of a qualified technician

for purposes of this work.

B. System problems and discrepancies may require additional technician time which shall be made

available for the subsequent commissioning periods until required system performance is

obtained.

C. The objective of functional performance testing is to advance the building systems from a state

of substantial completion to full dynamic operation in accordance with the specified design

requirements and design intent.

D. The Commissioning Authority shall direct system-testing protocols which, when implemented

by the Contractor, will allow the Commissioning Authority to observe, evaluate, identify

deficiencies, recommend modifications, tune, and document the systems and systems' equipment

performance over a range control modes of operation.

3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES

A. Maladjustments, misapplied equipment, and/or deficient performance under varying loads will

result in a system that does not meet Acceptable Performance. Correction of work will be

completed under the direction of the Owner's Representative and Architect, with input from the

Contractor, Equipment Supplier, and Commissioning Authority. Whereas all members will have

input and the opportunity to discuss, debate, and work out problems, the Architect/Engineer-of-

Record will have final jurisdiction on the necessary work to be done to achieve performance

and/or design intent.

B. Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit timely completion of the

commissioning process.

1. Experimentation to render system performance will be permitted.

a. If the Architect deems the experimentation work to be ineffective or untimely as it

relates to the commissioning process, the Architect will notify the Owner

indicating the nature of the problem, expected steps to be taken, and the deadline

for completion of activities.

b. If deadlines pass without resolution of the problem, the Owner reserves the right

to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem.

c. Costs incurred to solve the problem in an expeditious manner will be the

Contractor's responsibility.


ONTARIO, OR


3.5 PERFORMANCE PERIOD

A. Upon successful completion of functional test procedures, a performance period of 15

consecutive calendar days shall commence on first day following the last performance test. This

period shall be completed prior to final acceptance of the project. In event of failure to meet

standard of performance during any initiated performance period, it is not required that one 15-

calendar day period expire in order for another performance period to begin.

B. If equipment or system operation demonstrates continuing compliance with specified

requirements for a period of 15 consecutive calendar days from commencement date of

performance period, it shall be deemed to have met the standard of performance.

C. Equipment will not be accepted by the Owner and final payment will not be made by the Owner

until acceptable performance is met.

3.6 SEASONAL COMMISSIONING AND OCCUPANCY VARIATIONS

A. Seasonal commissioning pertains to testing under full-load conditions during peak heating and

peak cooling seasons, as well as part-load conditions in the spring and fall. Initial commissioning

will be done as soon as contract work is completed regardless of season. All equipment and

systems will be tested to their peak seasonal conditions. If this cannot be done during the time

functional testing is being performed that portion of the test will have to be done during peak

season to observe full-load performance. Heating equipment will be tested during winter design

extremes. Cooling equipment will be tested during summer design extremes with a fully

occupied building. The Contractor will be responsible to participate in the initial and the alternate

peak season test of the systems performance.

B. Subsequent commissioning may be required under conditions of occupancy or use. All

equipment and systems affected by occupancy variations will be tested to observe system

performance. The Contractor will be responsible to participate in the initial and the alternate

occupancy sensitive testing of systems to provide verification of adequate performance.

C. Discrepancies discovered with the Contractor's equipment or workmanship during alternate

testing periods will be handled as warranty items if the owner has taken position of the facility.

3.7 RETESTING AND RECOMMISSIONING

A. Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and retesting at no extra cost to Owner; if

a deficiency is not corrected and retested immediately, the Commissioning Authority will

document the deficiency.

1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of

equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or does not

perform properly.

2. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Contractor needs to notify the Commissioning

Authority that the item is ready to be retested; the Commissioning Authority will

reschedule the test and the Contractor shall retest.

3. Identical or Near-Identical Items: If ten percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical

or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items

will be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after


ONTARIO, OR


notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to

replacement of all items.

4. The Contractor will be allowed one retest by the Commissioning Authority after initial

testing of the equipment. If equipment fails testing a second time the Contractor shall bear

the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority's time for any additional retesting.

5. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority's time for any re-

testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant system readiness forms and/or

system check-out forms correctly and any subsequent retests.

3.8 TRAINING

A. The Division 22 Contractor will be required to participate in the training of the Owner's

engineering and maintenance staff for each mechanical system and the related components.

Training may be conducted in a classroom setting, with system and component documentation,

and suitable classroom training aids, or in the field with the specific equipment. The type of

training will be per the Owner's option.

B. A training plan will be developed by the Contractor outlining equipment that requires training.

The plan shall include who will perform the training, when the training will occur, and the

required duration of the training. Once the training plan is developed the Owner will provide a

list of the appropriate personnel attending the training.

C. Training sessions should cover using the Operations & Maintenance Manuals and as-built

drawings assembled by the Contractor as tools for understanding and troubleshooting

components, equipment and systems. This material needs to be supplied to the Owner a minimum

of two weeks prior to training taking place to allow participants time to review the material. This

helps focus training needs of the O & M staff.

D. Detailed requirements for training and instruction are contained in other Sections of these

Contract Documents. The Contractor needs to document what training has taken place and those

that have attended training.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT

A. Division 22 shall remove and replace covers of plumbing equipment, open access panels, etc., to

permit Contractor, Architect, Owner's Representative, and Commissioning Authority to observe

equipment and controllers provided. Furnish ladders and flashlights as necessary.

END OF SECTION 220800


ONTARIO, OR

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 221113 - 1

SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Force water piping, underground structures, and specialties.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Common work results for utilities: Section 330500.

1.3 QUALITY STANDARDS

A. Provide experienced, well-trained workers competent to complete the work as specified.

B. All work shall comply with governing building and safety codes.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Submit manufacture's certification that pipe, fittings, valves, fire hydrants, and appurtenance

meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Submit manufacture's installation instructions and maintain copy at the job site.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual location of constructed pipeline and other appurtenance in relation to

existing permanent benchmarks.

B. Provide copy of record documents to Owner prior to issuance of substantial completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Handle and store pipe manufacture's recommendations and in a manner which prevents shock,

damage or excessive exposure to sunlight and contamination.

B. Protect gasket material form sunlight and contamination.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


ONTARIO, OR


2.1 PIPE

A. See Civil, Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings and/or Specifications.

B. Water lines shall be ductile iron pipe class 52.

C. When a corrosive potential condition is encountered, all ductile iron pipe and fittings will be

polyethylene encased with an 8 mil tubing meeting manufacturer and AWWA Standards

D All pipe shall be pressure rated for 150 psi and all valves and fittings shall be pressure rated at

352 psi for ductile iron. All fittings shall be factory cement lined and coated.

E. Service line shall be Type K Copper Tubing meeting ASTM B88 or Polyethylene meeting

ASTM D3035 or ASTM D2737 may be acceptable for conditions where corrosive soils are

present, with approval of the City.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. See Civil, Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings and/or Specifications

B. Water valves shall be the same size as the water main. Main line valves shall be resilient seated

gate valves meeting the requirements of AWWA C509.

C. Corporation stops shall be Ford FB-1000 Iron pipe x CTS Pack Joint.

D. Fire Hydrant shall be Mueller 250 Super Centurion meeting the requirements of SD-404

Standard drawing for City of Ontario Standards for Public Works Construction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions

are as required, and ready to receive work.

C. Report in writing to Owner & Engineer any prevailing conditions that will adversely affect

satisfactory execution of any Work required by this Sections. Do not proceed with Work until

all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts all conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 PREPARATIONS

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or impede consistent

backfilling.

C. For Services cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. For mains, cut

pipe ends square and bevel per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

E. Prepare pipe for connections to equipment with flanges, unions, plain end and push-on, or

mechanical joints

3.3 BEDDING

A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 330500 for work

on the Section.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Maintain separation of water main from sanitary and storm sewer piping in accordance with

local or state code.

B. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600 and/or AWWA C605, manufacture's

published instructions and local or state requirements.

C. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints or a specified

by pipe manufacturer.

D. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new Work and

Existing piping, make connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each

connection with existing pipe at time and under conditions which least interfere with operation

of existing pipeline and in accordance with local and state code.

E. Tees for service lateral shall be installed at 100 percent slope an 1/16 or 1/8 bends shall be

installed to provide proper grade for service laterals.

F. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 330500.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as proposed. Only on sample joint

of each type selected by Owner representative needs testing. However, if the sample joint fails

because of faulty design or workmanship, an additional sample joint may be tested.

Performance requirements for joints in reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to ASHTO M

198 or ASTM C 443. Test requirements for joints in PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D 3212

or ASTM C 361.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings

B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural

capacity of floor when storing inside.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and

joining materials.

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting

the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be

joined.

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300

flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300

flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze

castings.

a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and

bolts and nuts.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on trap primers all sizes: Soft copper tube, Type

L; copper pressure fittings; and brazed joints.

D. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials:

1. NPS 6 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered

joints.

2. NPS 1/2 to NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L with plain ends; copper pressure fittings;

and pro-press joints.

a. Rigid tools pro-press system.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron

butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use

cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or

equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures

that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly

valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,

and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.

2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

D. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side

of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop

flow.


ONTARIO, OR


3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

B. Install sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration

through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make

installation watertight.

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,

inside the building at each domestic water service entrance.

D. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-

alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

B. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

C. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and

connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use

flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or

concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and

allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must

be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of

piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,

if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA

C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.



ONTARIO, OR

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Balancing valves.

4. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

5. Strainers.

6. Outlet boxes.

7. Wall hydrants.

8. Drain valves.

9. Water hammer arresters.

10. Trap-seal primer valves.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise

indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic

domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9."


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:



the following:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc.

b. Cash Acme.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Legend Valve.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Prier Products, Inc.

g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

h. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011.

3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Rough bronze.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:



the following:

a. Ames Co.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.

d. Flomatic Corporation.

e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.


3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

5. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller;

outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS

2-1/2 and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.


ONTARIO, OR


2.3 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:



the following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Flo Fab Inc.

c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div.

d. NIBCO INC.

e. TAC Americas.

f. Taco, Inc.


2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting

indicator.

3. Body: Brass or bronze,

4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.

5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:



the following:

a. Cash Acme.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. Honeywell Water Controls.

d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

e. Leonard Valve Company.

f. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.


h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve.

3. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawing.

2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


ONTARIO, OR


3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.6 OUTLET BOXES

A. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:



the following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company.

b. IPS Corporation.

c. LSP Products Group, Inc.

d. Oatey.

2. Mounting: Recessed.

3. Material and Finish: Plastic box and faceplate.

4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller

copper tube outlet.

5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water

tubing.

2.7 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:



the following:

a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Prier Products, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

g. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.


2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum CWP or Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.

5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.

2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.10 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:



the following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.


ONTARIO, OR


b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

e. Precision Plumbing Products


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

4. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawing.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:



the following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.





2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.

3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.

4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS

A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:



the following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.





2. Standard: ASSE 1044,

3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing.

4. Cabinet: Surface-mounting steel box with stainless-steel cover.

5. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power.

6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

7. Number Outlets: Four.

8. Size Outlets: NPS 1/2.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment" for

piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

D. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets

and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

E. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each and pump.

F. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking

wall reinforcement between studs.

G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

H. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for

proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Mechanical Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties.


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker and reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer

according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified

above.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.



ONTARIO, OR

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1

SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic

cold- and hot-water circulation:

1. High velocity cartridge circulator.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified

performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected

models, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:





ONTARIO, OR


2.2 HIGH VELOCITY CARTRIDGE CIRCULATOR

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries.

3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.

4. Taco, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, close-coupled, in-line, sealless

centrifugal pumps.

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge-type unit with

motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor

shaft mounted horizontally.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded companion-flange connections.

3. Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material.

4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Honeywell International, Inc.

b. Square D.

c. White-Rodgers Div.; Emerson Electric Co.

2. Type: Water-immersion sensor, for installation in hot-water circulation piping.

3. Range: 100 to 240 deg F.

4. Operation of Pump: On or off.

5. Settings: Base on Temp of start pump at 5 deg F below service temp and stop pump at

5 deg F over service temp.

6. See Plumbing Drawing for schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections

before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,

couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and

weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Install in-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.

3.3 CONTROL INSTALLATION

A. Install immersion-type thermostats in hot-water return piping.

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling

valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping.

2. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage

tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge

piping around pumps.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

E. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set thermostats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.


ONTARIO, OR


6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.



ONTARIO, OR

FACILITY SANITARY SEWER 221313 - 1

SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Gravity and force sanitary sewer piping, underground structures, and specialties.


A. Common work results for utilities: Section 330500




1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufacture's certification that pipe, fittings, clean outs, manholes, and appurtenance











PART 2 PRODUCTS


ONTARIO, OR


2.1 PIPE


B. Gravity Sewer pipe with diameter of 4-inch to 15-inch shall be solid wall PVC pipe shall

conform to ASTM D 3034 or SDR 35. Gravity Sewer pipe with diameter of 18-inch to 36-inch

shall be solid wall PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM F 679.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. See Civil, Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings and/or Specifications

B. Manholes shall conform to ASTM C 478.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION









3.2 PREPARATIONS



backfilling.





mechanical joints.


ONTARIO, OR


3.3 BEDDING


on the section.




B. Locator wire is required for all sewer pipes and manholes. The wire shall be 12 AWG UF with

green colored insulation and fastened to the top of the pipe with duct tape at intervals not

exceeding ten feet. The locator wire shall be installed outside the manhole at the grade ring

joint.

C. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D3034 and/or ASTM D2751, manufacture's

published instructions and local or state requirements.

D. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints or a specified


E. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new Work and




F. Tees for service lateral shall be installed at 100 percent slope an 1/16 or 1/8 bends shall be

installed to provide proper grade for service laterals.

G. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 330500.







or ASTM C 361.

B. All tracer lines shall be tested after backfilling is compete. A low-Voltage source shall be

connected to the tracer contacts, and a magnetic locator shall be used at intervals not greater

than 100 feet, to determine whether the pipe can be located with the magnetic locator. The

contractor shall supply the necessary testing equipment and personnel at no additional cost.

Faulty tracer wire shall be repaired by the contractor and retested.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand

the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for

plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent

piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


ONTARIO, OR


2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. AB&I Foundry.

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

3. Tyler Pipe.

B. Below Grade Pipe and Fittings: All below grade Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and fittings shall

conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM A 888. All pipe & fittings shall

be American made and tested, no imported pipe is acceptable.

C. Above Grade Pipe and Fittings: All above grade Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and fittings shall

conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM-888 and shall be marked with

the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institutes collective trademarks. All pipe and fittings shall be American

made and tested, no imported pipe is acceptable.

D. Documentation: At the request of the engineer the manufacturer shall furnish the following

information to confirm Compliance with CISPI 301:

1. Radiation Screening records.

2. Mechanical Testing records.

3. Chemical Testing records.

4. Dimensional Inspection reports.

5. Certificate letter from manufacturer with legal name and address.

E. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: Couplings shall conform to CISPI standard 310.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


the following:

a. ANACO-Husky.

b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

c. Fernco Inc.

d. Matco-Norca, Inc.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

g. Stant.

h. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

F. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:



the following:


ONTARIO, OR


a. MG Piping Products Company.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277.

3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and

nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in

OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with

pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping

system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

2) Fernco Inc.

3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.

c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include

shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on

each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:


ONTARIO, OR


1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:




1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be

joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:




1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.

2) Central Plastics Company.

3) Hart Industries International, Inc.

4) Jomar International Ltd.

5) Matco-Norca, Inc.

6) McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

7) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

8) Wilkins; a Zurn company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

D. Install cast iron piping for the first 10 feet-0 inch of below grade piping from the dishwasher

drain to a point of transition to PVC piping (if used).

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices

specified in Division 23 Section 230548 "Seismic Controls for Plumbing and HVAC."

L. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,

double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

M. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.


ONTARIO, OR


N. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping

NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger

2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

O. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105/A 21.5.

P. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

Q. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for

cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for

drains specified in Division 22 Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

V. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based

latex paint.


A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section 230523 "General-

Duty Valves for Plumbing and HVAC Piping."


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section 230548

"Seismic Controls for Plumbing and HVAC."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Division 23 Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.

4. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

5. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.


ONTARIO, OR


6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

7. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:


2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.


5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and

union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Division 23 Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and

Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to


B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:




2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside

leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with

water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes

before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect

joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps

filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-

stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into

piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap

of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without

introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture

connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until



ONTARIO, OR



3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground in ceiling space, Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M (C) or DWV, drawn-temper

copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

C. Aboveground on roof, Condensate-Drain Piping: Solid wall schedule 40 PVC pipe with PVC

socket fittings and solvent cemented joints.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings

2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Aboveground, vent piping shall be any of the following:



D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:





ONTARIO, OR

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.

3. Floor sinks.

4. Grease interceptors.

5. Roof drains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary

and storm piping specialty components.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:



the following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.


d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:



the following:


b. Oatey.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:



the following:

a. Commercial Enameling Co.

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Prier Products, Inc.


ONTARIO, OR






2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawing.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

2.3 FLOOR SINKS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Sink:



the following:

a. Commercial Enameling Co.

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Prier Products, Inc.





2. Standard: ASME A112.6.7. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawing.

3. Pattern: Floor sink.

2.4 ROOF DRAINS

A. Metal Roof Drains:



the following:


b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

3. Pattern: Roof drain.

4. Body Material: Cast iron

5. Outlet: Bottom.

6. Dome Material: Cast iron.

7. Underdeck Clamp: Required.

8. Sump Receiver: Required.


ONTARIO, OR


2.5 GREASE INTERCEPTORS

A. Grease Interceptors:



the following:

a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

b. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and greases from

food preparation wastewater.

3. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.

4. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel

5. Flow Rate: 25 gpm.

6. Grease Retention Capacity: 50 lbs.

7. Cleanout: Integral.

8. Mounting: Above floor.

9. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.

10. Operation: Manual cleaning.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

B. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment" for

piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated.

F. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.

G. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

H. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

I. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

J. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.


ONTARIO, OR


K. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy

access and maintenance.

L. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

M. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding

pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Plumbing Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



ONTARIO, OR

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1

SECTION 221413 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Roof drains and fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-

pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable

of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum

Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-

sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.

2.2 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS


following:

1. AB&I Foundry.

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

3. Tyler Pipe.

B. Below Grade Pipe and Fittings: All below grade Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and fittings shall

conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM A 888. All pipe and fittings

shall be American made and tested, no imported pipe is acceptable.

C. Above Grade Pipe and Fittings: All above grade Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and fittings shall

conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM-888 and shall be marked with

the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institutes collective trademarks. All pipe & fittings shall be American

made and tested, no imported pipe is acceptable.

D. Documentation: At the request of the engineer the manufacturer shall furnish the following

information to confirm Compliance with CISPI 301:

1. Radiation Screening records.

2. Mechanical Testing records.

3. Chemical Testing records.

4. Dimensional Inspection reports.

5. Certificate letter from manufacturer with legal name and address.

E. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated

shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.


a. ANACO.

b. Fernco, Inc.

c. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.

d. Mission Rubber Co.

e. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

F. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel

bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.



ONTARIO, OR


a. ANACO.

b. Fernco, Inc.

c. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.

d. Mission Rubber Co.

e. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

2.4 ROOF DRAINS

A. Metal Roof Drains:



the following:


b. MIFAB, Inc.


d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.


2.5 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Conductor Nozzles:

1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting

holes.

2. Size: Same as connected conductor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints.



ONTARIO, OR


C. Underground storm drainage piping shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and coupled joints.



A. Coordinate with civil drawings for storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results

for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Section 230548

"Seismic Controls for Plumbing and HVAC."

D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm

sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Plumbing Sections.

E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe

penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to

make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Section

230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

F. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.

Make installation watertight.

G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

H. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep

bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard

increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage

piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades

and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Horizontal Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

K. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab

is without membrane waterproofing.


ONTARIO, OR


L. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.

M. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by



A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Section 230500 "Common Work

Results for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

B. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Section 230548 "Seismic Controls for Plumbing and

HVAC."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing

and HVAC Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer than 100 Feet, if indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:





E. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.


ONTARIO, OR


G. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:





5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.

3.5 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to


B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:




2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of

roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow,

but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until



ONTARIO, OR



3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 221513 - 1

SECTION 221513 - GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems

operating at 200 psig and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.

C. High-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: System of compressed-air piping and specialties

operating at pressures between 125 and 200 psig.

D. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: System of compressed-air piping and specialties

operating at pressures of 125 psig and less.

E. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.


A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing

Procedure and Performance Qualification."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

C. Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for high-pressure compressed-air piping.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure compressed-air

piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the


1. Piping:

a. Central Sprinkler Company.

b. Grinnell Corp.

c. Star Pipe Products, Inc.

d. Victaulic Company of America.

e. Ward Manufacturing, Inc.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining

materials.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L, seamless, drawn-temper, water tube. Provide Type K

if indicated.

1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73,

wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.

2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300. Provide Class 300 if

indicated.

3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123.

4. Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze

castings and made by keyed-coupling manufacturer.

a. Copper-Tubing Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, NBR gasket suitable for

compressed air, and bolts and nuts. Provide FPM gasket if indicated.

B. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size

as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.


ONTARIO, OR


2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for joining materials not in this

Section.

2.5 VALVES

A. General-Duty Valves: Refer to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping" for

metal ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe general-duty valves.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identification of

piping, valves, gages, and specialties.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings

same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Joining of Dissimilar Metal Piping: Use dielectric fittings. Refer to Section 230500 "Common

Work Results for HVAC" for dielectric fitting types.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions.

2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric flanges.

C. Specialty and Equipment Flanged Connections: Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with

gasket and brazed joint for connection to copper tube.

D. Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.


A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping installation.

B. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of airflow.


A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping and valve

installation.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Install metal general-duty valves according to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC

Piping."

C. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from general-service compressed-air specialties,

equipment, and accessories. Install strainer if indicated.


A. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping joint

construction.

B. Join copper tubing with brazed joints. Use silver-composition or copper-phosphorus-

composition filler metal and comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," Section VII,

"Brazed Joints."

C. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings.


A. Refer to Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

seismic-restraint devices.

B. Refer to Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for pipe

hanger and support devices. Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

C. Install supports according to Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

E. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

F. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.


5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.



ONTARIO, OR


8. NPS 2-1/2: 13 feet with 1/2-inch rod.


H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to specialties and equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air compressors, accessories, and specialties with shutoff valve and union or

flanged connection.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test and adjust piping safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning safety

controls.

2. Piping Leak Tests: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general-

service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50

psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and

let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test

pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

a. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Report results in writing.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS 223100 - 1

SECTION 223100 - DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial water softeners.

1. Chemicals.

2. Water testing kits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Water Softeners. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,

and accessories.

2. Water testing kits.

B. Shop Drawings: For water softeners. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

connections to piping systems.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that water softeners comply with

requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water softeners to include in emergency, operation, and


E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


ONTARIO, OR



A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water

softeners and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section 016000

"Product Requirements."



intended use.

C. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of water softener that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of mineral and brine tanks.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

d. Attrition loss of resin exceeding 3 percent per year.

e. Mineral washed out of system during service run or backwashing period.

f. Effluent turbidity greater and color darker than incoming water.

g. Fouling of underdrain system, gravel, and resin, with turbidity or by dirt, rust, or

scale from softener equipment or soft water, while operating according to

manufacturer's written operating instructions.

2. Commercial Water Softener, Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Mineral Tanks: Five years.

b. Brine Tanks: Two years.

c. Controls: Five years.

d. Underdrain Systems: Five years.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance: Submit two copies of manufacturer's "Agreement for Continued Service and

Maintenance," before Substantial Completion, for Owner's acceptance. Offer terms and

conditions for furnishing chemicals and providing continued testing and servicing to include


ONTARIO, OR


replacing materials and equipment. Include one-year term of agreement with option for one-

year renewal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:




2.2 COMMERCIAL WATER SOFTENERS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type water softener.


a. Alamo Water Treatment; Ecodyne Water Treatment.

b. Culligan International Company.

c. Kinetico Incorporated.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects."

3. Configuration: Twin unit with two mineral tanks and one brine tank.

4. Mineral Tanks: FRP, pressure-vessel quality.

a. Construction: Non-ASME code.

b. Pressure Rating: 100 psig minimum.

c. Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 40 to at least 100

deg F.

d. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed

level.

e. Upper Distribution System: Single, point type, fabricated from galvanized-steel

pipe and fittings.

f. Lower Distribution System: Hub and radial-arm or header-lateral type; fabricated

from nonmetallic pipe and fittings with individual, fine-slotted, nonclogging

plastic strainers; arranged for even flow distribution through resin bed.

5. Controls: Automatic; factory mounted on unit and factory wired.

a. Adjustable duration of various regeneration steps.

b. Push-button start and complete manual operation.

c. Electric time clock and switch for automatic operation, except for manual return to

service.

d. Sequence of Operation: Program multiport pilot-control valve to automatically

pressure-actuate main operating valve through steps of regeneration.


ONTARIO, OR


e. Pointer on pilot-control valve shall indicate cycle of operation.

f. Means of manual operation of pilot-control valve if power fails.

6. Brine Tank: Combination measuring and wet-salt storing system.

a. Tank and Cover Material: Fiberglass, 3/16-inch thick; or molded PE, 3/8-inch

thick.

b. Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of brine

withdrawn and freshwater refill.

c. Size: Large enough for at least four regenerations at full salting.

7. Factory-Installed Accessories:

a. Piping, valves, tubing, and drains.

b. Sampling cocks.

c. Main-operating-valve position indicators.

d. Water meters.

2.3 CHEMICALS

A. Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene ion-exchange resin that is stable over entire pH

range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock.

B. Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and

granulated forms are not acceptable.

1. Form: Processed, food-grade salt pellets.

2.4 WATER TESTING SETS

A. Description: Manufacturer's standard water-hardness testing apparatus and chemicals with

testing procedure instructions. Include metal container suitable for wall mounting.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Hydrostatically test mineral tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating.

B. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE BASES

A. Coordinate physical size of water softener system for concrete housekeeping base.


ONTARIO, OR


3.2 WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water softener equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain

manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require

servicing are accessible. Anchor mineral and brine tanks and floor-mounting accessories to

substrate.

B. Install seismic restraints for tanks and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building

structure.

C. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by equipment manufacturer but not specified to be

factory installed.

D. Prepare mineral-tank distribution system and underbed for minerals and place specified mineral

into mineral tanks.

E. Install water testing sets mounted on wall, unless otherwise indicated, and near water softeners.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Plumbing Sections. Drawings indicate


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between water-softener-unit headers and dissimilar-metal water

piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 230500 "Common

Work for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

D. Install shutoff valves on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank, and

on inlet and outlet headers.

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing and HVAC Piping."

2. Exception: Water softeners with factory-installed shutoff valves at locations indicated.

E. Install valved bypass water piping around water softeners.

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing and HVAC Piping."

2. Water piping is specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

F. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.

G. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."


ONTARIO, OR



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:



2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation.


equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning water softeners that do not pass tests and inspections and

retest as specified above.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE



B. Add water to brine tanks and fill with salt.

C. Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total

of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance

characteristics. Comply with the following:

1. ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water."

2. ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water."

3. ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water."



ONTARIO, OR

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:

1. Commercial, high-efficiency, power direct-vented, gas water heaters.

2. Water heater accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,

operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial water heater, signed by product

manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial water

heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548

"Seismic Controls for Plumbing and HVAC." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and


G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


ONTARIO, OR



A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water

heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section 016000

"Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1

through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Five years.

b. Compression Tanks: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:


ONTARIO, OR





2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, High-Efficiency, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.


a. Bradford White Corporation.

b. Lochinvar Corporation.

c. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.

d. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.

e. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.

f. State Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion

efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be

modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for

performance.

3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150 psig minimum working-pressure

rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings

to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel

and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and

copper-alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

4. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.

c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.

d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls.

e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as

heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure

rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.


ONTARIO, OR


5. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency

requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

6. Temperature Control: LCD control system including operational history.

7. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or

systems.

2.3 COMPRESSION TANKS

A. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed,

butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.


a. AMTROL Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Flexcon Industries.

d. State Industries, Inc.

e. Taco, Inc.

f. Watts Regulator Co.

2. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in

piping.

B. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating, capacity, and

pressure differential required between gas supply and water heater.

C. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

D. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as

great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.

Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of water

heater.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.


ONTARIO, OR


F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base

of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

G. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.


A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according

to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one

and one-half times pressure rating.

C. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases. Coordinate size with general contractor.

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and

referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so

controls and devices needing service are accessible.

C. Install seismic restraints for commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate.

D. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.

E. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.

F. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure

regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater,

relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward

pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters

that do not have tank drains.

I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Section 230519 "Meters and

Gages for Plumbing and HVAC Piping" for thermometers.

J. Fill water heaters with water.


ONTARIO, OR


K. Charge compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings indicate


B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for

easy removal of water heaters.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,

and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.


1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.


equipment.

C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified

above.



ONTARIO, OR

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Faucets for lavatories, sinks.

2. Flushometers.

3. Toilet seats.

4. Protective shielding guards.

5. Fixture supports.

6. Commercial sinks

7. Water closets.

8. Urinals.

9. Lavatories.

10. Service Basin.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,

fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials

and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category

through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single

manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that

category.



intended use.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, Americans with Disabilities Act and

Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines (36 CFR, Part 1191: ADAABAAG), as

prepared by the U.S. Access Board, including Facilities Management and Construction "School

Facilities Design Handbook/Space Templates," issued June 25, 2007. (U.S. Code, Title 25,

Section 2005)

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy

Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. 2017 Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code with Amendments and all local requirements.

F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are

compatible.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing

fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.

3. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.

4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory

and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.

3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.

4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.

5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.

6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.

9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.

11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.

12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.

3. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

4. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.


ONTARIO, OR


K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.

2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.

5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS

A. Products are specified by naming acceptable products to establish required quality and function.

Subject to compliance with requirements, the products of other manufacturers that are of equal

quality and function and that are approved by the Architect may be incorporated into the Work.

1. Comply with Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" to submit for approval of

products not named as acceptable products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be

installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'

written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.

2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

Valves are specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing and HVAC

Piping."

H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to

sanitary drainage system.

I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage

system.

J. Install toilet seats on water closets.

K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are

not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

L. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop

valves.

M. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if

faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

O. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within

cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

Escutcheons are specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC

Equipment."

P. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in

Division 07 Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS



B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


ONTARIO, OR



A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where

installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified

components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate

properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers

and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect

exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 1

SECTION 224500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following emergency plumbing fixtures:

1. Combination units, eyewash and shower.

2. Water-tempering equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by

people with disabilities.

B. Cooled Water: Cooled potable water produced by water cooler.

C. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution supply.

F. Tepid: Approximately 85 deg F temperature.

1. Allowable Variation: Plus or minus 5 deg F.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include flow rates and capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;

furnished specialties; and accessories for each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality

Control" Article.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures, include maintenance manuals.




intended use.

B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law

101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with

disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-

187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy

Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be

installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. For fixture descriptions in other Part 2 articles where the subparagraph titles "Available

Products" and "Products" introduce a list of manufacturers and their products, the following

requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in other

Part 2 articles.

2.2 COMBINATION UNITS

A. Combination Units: Plumbed, freestanding type with emergency shower and eye/face wash

equipment.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Available Products:

a. Bradley Corporation.

b. Chicago Faucet Co.

c. Encon Safety Products.

d. Guardian Equipment Co.

e. Haws Corporation.

f. Lab Safety Supply, Inc.

g. Murdock, Inc.

h. Speakman Co.

i. WaterSaver Faucet Co.

j. Western Emergency Equipment.

2. See Plumbing Fixture schedule on drawings.

2.3 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT

A. Hot and Cold-Water-Tempering Equipment: Factory-fabricated equipment including water

thermostatic mixing valve designed to provide 85 deg F potable water at emergency plumbing

fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F throughout required 15-minute test

period, and in case of unit failure to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls,

corrosion-resistant metal piping, and enclosure.

1. Available Products:

a. Bradley Corporation.

b. Encon Safety Products.

c. Haws Corporation.

d. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc.

e. Leonard Valve Co.

f. Speakman Co.

g. Western Emergency Equipment.


A. Certify performance of plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections

before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


ONTARIO, OR


3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.

D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if

specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if

permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Refer to

Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing and HVAC Piping" for general-duty

shutoff valves.

1. Exception: Omit shutoff valves on supplies to emergency equipment if prohibited by


E. Install shutoff valve and strainer in steam piping and shutoff valve in condensate return piping.

F. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are made of

different metals. Refer to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC

Equipment" for dielectric fittings.

G. Install trap and waste to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be directly

connected to drainage system.

H. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Refer

to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment" for

escutcheons.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



B. Connect hot and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water-tempering equipment.

Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures.

C. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to

sanitary or storm drainage piping.


A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for

compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and temperatures.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements

are made.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Report test results in writing.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.

B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

DRINKING FOUNTAINS 224700 - 1

SECTION 224700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following drinking fountains and related components:

1. Drinking fountains.

2. Fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Drinking Fountain: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with

disabilities.

B. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking.

C. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

D. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated.

E. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and





intended use.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law

101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"


D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style

classifications.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, Americans with Disabilities Act and

Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines (36 CFR, Part 1191: ADAABAAG), as

prepared by the U.S. Access Board, including Facilities Management and Construction "School

Facilities Design Handbook/Space Templates," issued June 25, 2007. (U.S. Code, Title 25,

Section 2005)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS - SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON

DRAWINGS

2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Josam Co.

2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.

3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.

6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, drinking fountain carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights

with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.

1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.

2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.

3. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of

steel pipe uprights.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of

supports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain

copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless


B. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by


C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached

for operation. Valves are specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing and

HVAC Piping."

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern

escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in

Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS




ONTARIO, OR


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with

requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

2. Report test results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,

and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



ONTARIO, OR

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC EQUIPMENT 230500 - 1

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Record Documents, Maintenance Manuals, and General Provisions for mechanical work.

2. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

3. Transition fittings.

4. Dielectric fittings.

5. Mechanical sleeve seals.

6. Sleeves.

7. Escutcheons.

8. Mechanical demolition.

9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

10. Painting and finishing.

11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



2. Mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Escutcheons.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by

the engineer and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are

appropriately modified without added cost to Project. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies

are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that

are concealed behind finished surfaces.

1.6 FEES AND PERMITS

A. Contractor shall apply and pay for all permits, inspections, reviews, etc. required by the


1. This shall include the cost of extending the natural gas service from the utility company

main line to the building meter, setting the meter and regulator and all related utility

company costs.

2. The Contractor shall include in his/her Bid all system development or similarly named

fee imposed by the serving utility company or governing entity (City, County, etc.).

1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section 017700

"Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate the

following installed conditions:

1. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations

of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units requiring periodic

maintenance or repair.

2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and

numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (ie.

traps, strainers, tanks, etc.). Refer to Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing and

HVAC Piping and Equipment." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of

underground piping.

3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed) dimensioned from prominent building

lines.

4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed. Revise equipment schedules.

5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.


ONTARIO, OR


1.8 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 Section 017700 "Closeout

Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01. Assemble O & M

Manuals as follows:

1. Compile three copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the mechanical systems

and equipment. The manuals shall be provided to the Architect for approval complete

and at one time, prior to requesting final payment. Partial or separate data will be

returned for completion.

2. Manuals shall be assembled in three-ring binders. Binders shall be 3 inches thick or less

and more than one binder shall be used for each set of data if required to prevent

overfilling of one binder. Binders shall have plastic coating with correct name of the

Project permanently attached to the spine. All information shall be arranged in Sections

and each Section shall have a blank buff colored, heavy paper divider with a protruding

tab clearly labeled. Sections shall be arranged in the same order that the equipment is

listed in the Specification and each Specification Section shall have a separate tab. Shop

Drawings which are larger than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches shall be individually folded so

they are 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches or less and inserted behind the appropriate tab.

3. Tabs shall be labeled and arranged as follows:

a. Index: Furnish under the first tab an index of Sections listing name of Section and

Specification numbers.

b. Equipment Manufacturers: Furnish under the second tab a complete typed list of

equipment suppliers and manufacturers representative including type of

equipment, name, address and phone number. The company listed here should be

the one which could furnish replacement parts and offer technical information

about the equipment.

c. Valve Directory: Furnish under this tab a typed copy of the valve chart required.

d. Product Literature: Each tab, starting with the fourth shall contain the name of a

Specification Section. Behind each tab shall be the previously submitted and

approved Shop Drawing, factory published operation and maintenance instructions

and parts lists.

4. Upon completion and approval of the booklets, one copy shall be given to the Architect,

and two to the Owner. Using the booklet, the Mechanical Contractor shall explain in

detail and instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the correct operation and

maintenance of the equipment.

1.9 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

A. Interferences: Project design took into account potential interferences between trades (e.g.

mechanical ductwork with piping or with electrical light fixtures), however, not every

interference has been eliminated. It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder and potential

Contractor to field verify all mechanical piping and duct routing, making allowances for

existing beams, pipes, ducts, hangers, and other obstructions. Provide HVAC duct offsets and

transitions as required maintaining duct aspect ratios within 10 percent of design. The cost

associated with interferences shall be included in the Base Bid.

B. Examination of Project Drawings:


ONTARIO, OR


1. The Drawings (Plans, elevations, flow schematics, etc.) for the mechanical work are

intended to convey Scope of Work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations

of end-use equipment, systems, etc., and the approximate sizes thereof.

2. The Contractor shall determine the exact location and mounting heights of equipment,

rough-ins, and the exact routing and positioning of piping/ductwork equipment so as to

best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the Drawings will not be sufficient for

determining these locations. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in

indicated arrangements and locations, such changes shall be made, by the Contractor, at

no additional cost to the Client.

3. Because of the scale of the Drawings, certain basic items/materials and quantities thereof,

(e.g. fittings, connectors, flanges, unions, pipe wells, couplings, hangers, sleeves, clamps,

screws, hooks, inserts, pipe/duct mounted - meters, gauges, sensors, etc.) may not be

shown, but where such items are required by other Sections of the Specifications or

where they are required for proper installation of the Work, such items shall be furnished

and installed and the cost thereof, reflected in the Base Bid.

4. The determination of quantities of HVAC and plumbing end-use systems and equipment

required shall be made by the Contractor from the Drawings. Interferences and quantities

and locations of basic items/materials may not be indicated on the Drawings and will

require field verification and determination by the Contractor.

5. The Contractor shall coordinate the location and method of support of the piping/duct

systems with that of all installations under other Divisions and Sections of the

Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following




the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining

methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.


ONTARIO, OR


1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face

or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BcuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,

unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Eslon Thermoplastics.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-

joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working

pressure at 180 deg F.


ONTARIO, OR



a. Central Plastics Company.

b. Epco Sales, Inc.

c. Hart Industries, International, Inc.

d. Watts Industries, Inc., Water Products Div.

e. Zurn Industries, Inc., Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.


a. Central Plastics Company.

b. Epco Sales, Inc.

c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-

face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic

washers, and steel backing washers.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300 psig minimum

working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic

lining; threaded ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.


a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;

plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.


a. Perfection Corp.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Victaulic Co. of America.


ONTARIO, OR


2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain

ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely

fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers

opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.

1. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw and polished chrome-plated.

C. Split-Plate, Cast-Brass or Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, spring clips and chrome-

plated finish.

D. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 Sections for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated

to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment

operational.

5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.


ONTARIO, OR


C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and

quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawing Plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split plate, cast-brass or stamped steel

type with polished chrome-plated finish.

L. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.


ONTARIO, OR


M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof

slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings

below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to

extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section

076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or

pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve

for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight

seal.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal

pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular

clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight

seal.

P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.


ONTARIO, OR


3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut







G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.


ONTARIO, OR


3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a

component of equipment.

B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral

component of motorized equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate

data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting arrangements; size, type,

and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information

on coatings or finishes.

B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned Plans, Elevations, Sections, and

Details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the

following:

1. Each installed unit's type and details.

2. Nameplate legends.

3. Diagrams of power and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type

of motor and for each control scheme.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to be included in operation and



A. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from a

single manufacturer.


ONTARIO, OR




intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors that are:

1. Compatible with the following:

a. Magnetic controllers.

b. Multispeed controllers.

c. Reduced-voltage controllers.

2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use

throughout speed range without overheating.

3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.

4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor

replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for

belt tensioning.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows:

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in another

Section.

2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or

characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase.

B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase.

C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to

which motor is connected.

E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

H. Enclosure: Open drip proof.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: AC polyphase induction motors NEMA Nominal Efficiency shall meet or exceed

the efficiency standards listed. The NEMA Nominal Rating is identified on the motor

nameplate.

Motors (full load)

HP 1200 RPM 1800 3600

1 82.5 85.5 77.0

1.5 86.5 86.5 84.0

2 87.5 86.5 85.5

3 88.5 89.5 85.5

5 89.5 89.5 86.5

7.5 90.2 91.0 88.5

10 91.7 91.7 89.5

15 91.7 93.0 90.2

20 92.4 93.0 91.0

25 93.0 93.6 91.7

30 93.6 94.1 91.7

C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.

1. Finish: Gray enamel.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for

controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control

method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.

2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.

3. Insulation: Class H.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings,

integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with nonhygroscopic

material.

1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:

1. Measure winding resistance.

2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.

3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.

4. Perform high-potential test.


ONTARIO, OR


2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor

application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.

3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on

motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load

transfer link.

B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 03.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 230548 "Seismic

Controls for Plumbing and HVAC."

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's


2. Verify bearing lubrication.

3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at

motor design load.

4. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.

5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase is within nameplate rating and NEMA MG

1 tolerances.

B. Manufacturers' Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,


and to field test. Report results in writing.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Perform the following field tests and prepare test reports:

1. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections including tests and

inspections stated in NETA ATS on field-installed motors. Certify compliance with test

parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.



ONTARIO, OR

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230519 - 1

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:

1. Thermometers.

2. Gages.

3. Test plugs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves, Shop Drawings,

operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:




2.2 SOLAR DIGITAL THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft.

2. Trerice, H. O. Co.

3. MILJOCO Corporation

4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

5. Weksler Instruments.

B. Case: High Impact ABS Plastic or cast aluminum.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Resolution: 0.10 deg F

D. Recalibration: Internal potentiometer.

E. Display: LCD, black, digits 9/16-inch or larger.

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with

locking device.

G. Stem: Aluminum.

H. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor.

I. Accuracy: Greater valve of 1 deg F, or 1 percent of reading.

J. Range: -40 deg F to 300 deg F, field switchable to deg C.

K. Power: No external power required. Functions with 10 lux of illumination.

2.3 METAL CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS


1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.




B. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 7 inches long.

C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic filled, with magnifying lens. Mercury is not acceptable.

D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings.

E. Window: Glass.

F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with

locking device.

G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket or well and of length to suit installation.

H. Mounting Bracket for Ducts: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold

thermometer stem.

I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of

1.5 percent of range.


ONTARIO, OR


2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.

B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,

diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES


1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

2. Ernst Gage Co.

3. Eugene Ernst Products Co.

4. Marsh Bellofram.


6. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.



9. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME

B40.100.

1. Case: Liquid-filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2 inches diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is

indicated.

4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.

6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal.

7. Window: Glass.

8. Ring: Metal.

9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.

10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.

11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

C. Pressure-Gage Fittings:

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal

disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.6 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

3. Sisco Manufacturing Co.


5. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless steel body with core inserts and gasketed and

threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.

2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Install meters and gages as indicated.

B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Domestic Hot Water and Recirculated Domestic Hot water: 30 to 180 deg F, with

2-degree scale divisions.

2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Install liquid filled pressure gauges as noted on Drawings.

B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.

3.3 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of diameter of pipe and in vertical position

in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.

C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most

readable position.

D. Install ball-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

E. Install test plugs in tees in piping.


ONTARIO, OR


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and

temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and

arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list

indicating valve and its application.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1

for power piping.

B. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Kitz Corporation of America.

e. Victaulic Company of America.


ONTARIO, OR


f. NIBCO, Inc.

g. Watts Industries, Inc.

2. Butterfly Valves:

a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.

b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.

c. Grinnell Corp.

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.

f. Kitz Corporation of America.

g. Line, Mark Controls Corporation.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.

i. NIBCO Inc.

j. Victaulic Company of America.

3. Swing Check Valves:

a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.

b. Hammond Valve.

c. Kitz Corporation of America.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.

e. NIBCO, Inc.

f. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).

g. Victaulic Company of America.

h. Watts Industries, Inc.

2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.

1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of

rising stems.

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this

Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special

operator features:

1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves,

which shall have square heads.

3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches and larger, installed 96 inches or higher

above finished floor elevation.

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to

receive insulation.


ONTARIO, OR


F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze

valves.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600 psi CWP, ASTM B 584

bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-

inch valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof;

bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals. Ball valves shall be full-port type for steam

condensate applications as indicated.

1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.

2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.

B. End Connection: Threaded.

2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, 150 psi maximum pressure differential, ASTM A

126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, EPDM sleeve and stem

seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:

1. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron for HVAC and plumbing.

2. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Lever handle with latch lock.

3. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches to 24 Inches: Gear operator with position indicator.

B. Valves shall be capable of bubble-tight dead-end shut-off at full rated pressure without the need

of a downstream blind flange.

2.5 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200 psi CWP, or Class

150, 300 psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating

bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat.

B. End Connection: Threaded.

C. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200 psi CWP, ASTM A

126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved end

connections.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operation.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable

for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

F. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.

G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Silent Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position.

3.3 VALVE END SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, 2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded ends.


ONTARIO, OR


3.4 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and

butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve

applications and arrangements. Select trim to suit piping systems:

B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types.

1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600 psi CWP, with stem extension.

2. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated

ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

3. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.

4. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before

final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Fastener systems.

5. Equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:



the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc.

8. Paint Coating: Acrylic.

9. Plastic Coating: PVC.


ONTARIO, OR


2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange

for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated

trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Fastener System Installation:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert for pipes 2 inches and larger. Run

insulation continuously through hanger and install a galvanized Type 40 insulation

shield between hanger and insulation for pipes smaller than 2 inches.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Where indicated, install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without

vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining

insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier smaller

than 2 inches. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048-inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06-inch thick.


ONTARIO, OR


c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06-inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075-inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105-inch thick.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

Pipe Size Pipe Material MSS

Hanger

Type

Manufacturer/Model Notes

1/2" - 4" Bare Steel Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 65

5" - 14" Bare Steel Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 260

1/2" - 4" Bare Copper Type 9 ANVIL Fig. CT-99

or CT-65

1/2" - 4" Insulated Copper (Hot) Type 9 ANVIL Fig. CT-99

or CT-65

1/2" - 12" Insulated Steel (Hot) Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 300 Hanger may contact

pipe.

1/2" - 1-1-2" Insulated Copper and

Steel (Cold)

Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 300

with shield

No pipe contact

allowed.

2" - 12" Insulated Copper and

Steel (Cold)

Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 300

with shield and

insert

No pipe contact

allowed.


ONTARIO, OR


2" - 8" Cast Iron Sewer Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 260

1/2" - 4" Bare PVC Type 1 ANVIL Fig. 65

Epoxy Coated

5" - 18" Bare PVC Type 1 ANVIL Fib. 260

(Epoxy Coated)

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:


ONTARIO, OR


a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.



ONTARIO, OR

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Seismic snubbers.

2. Restraining braces and cables.

3. Restrained isolators.

B. The requirements of this seismic restraint Section are in addition to other requirements as

specified for support and attachment of equipment and mechanical services.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Seismic Design Category as Defined in the IBC: C.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

a. Component Importance Factor: (1.0) for all ductwork, equipment and piping

except (1.5) for Natural gas piping, or other identified hazardous piping indicated.

b. Component Response Modification Factor: As required by IBC 2015 and ASCE

7-10 for specific component.

c. Component Amplification Factor: As required by IBC 2015 and ASCE 7-10 for

specific component.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): See Drawing

S001.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: See Drawing S001.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



ONTARIO, OR


1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

2. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic restraint products shall be of the same manufacturer.

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or

preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum

seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on

calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing

are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-

restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. All piping and ductwork is to be retrained to meet code requirements. The seismic restraint

manufacturer will provide documentation on maximum restraint spacing for various cable sizes

and anchors. In addition, the seismic restraint manufacturer will provide support documentation

containing adequate information to allow the installation contractor to make reasonable field

modifications to suit special case conditions.

F. Seismic Restraint Designers/Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide

seismic design services and products by one of the following:

1. Amber/Booth Co. Inc.

2. Kinetics Noise Control.

3. Mason Industries.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESTRAINED ISOLATORS

A. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Materials: Ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,

oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and

attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-

bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop

restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to

weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, neoprene or

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting

and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having

jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications

shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of

components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be

subjected.

B. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and

replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or

female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch thick resilient cushion.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted

steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;

and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables pre-stretched with end connections

made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining

cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted

connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.


ONTARIO, OR


F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid

equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and

size of attachment devices used.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic control devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on shop

drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic

forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads

within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of all seismic restraint materials shall be installed according to the manufacturer's

installation instructions and project shop drawings.

B. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate

snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and

supporting structure. Snubbers are not needed if restrained isolators are used.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125-inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports and longitudinal supports as required for the site spectral response.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

G. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or

branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate

with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one

supporting the connections as they approach equipment.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment markers.

2. Pipe markers.

3. Valve Tags


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping

Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification

devices for piping.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 5000, "Building Construction and Safety Code."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent

adhesive.

1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.

2. Data:


ONTARIO, OR


a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.

c. Design capacity.

d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,

and speed.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for

equipment.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,

and showing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type

pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or

as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor

barrier.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive

back.

E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,

permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: 3/4-inch

minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches or Larger: 1-1/2

inches minimum.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for

fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch thick brass or aluminum.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other related Sections. If more than single-

type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical

equipment.

1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger

lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-

fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify

units.

3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general

categories of equipment:

a. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.

b. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, and rooftop units.

c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.

d. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment.

e. Fans, blowers, mixing boxes and VAV boxes.

f. Packaged HVAC central-station air handling units.

g. Tanks and pressure vessels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow

indication arrows showing direction of flow.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.

Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4-inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2

inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.

Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3

inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

B. Locate pipe markers where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible

maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; exterior nonconcealed locations and

concealed ceiling spaces as follows:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Access doors to fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled to read "Fire Damper,"

"Fire/Smoke Damper," "Smoke Damper," as applicable. (NFPA 5000, 8.8.8.4(6) and

8.10.5.4(6)).

6. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

7. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

8. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings at intervals of 50 feet.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;

convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar

roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Valve-Tag Color: Natural brass or aluminum.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.



ONTARIO, OR

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for all air and water systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of

evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Sample Report Forms: Submit one set of sample TAB report forms.

C. Certified TAB reports.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.

B. The Test and Balance Contractor shall be an independent consultant. The firm shall be

independent of all Contractors including the Mechanical and Temperature Controls Contractor.

C. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's representatives to develop a mutual understanding of the

details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized

service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven

days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. The Contract Documents examination report.

c. TAB plan.

d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.

e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

D. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the

following:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified

and referenced in this Specification.

E. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." Or from SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently

if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the

name of party performing instrument calibration.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to

support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-

control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required

by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing

devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and

equipment operation.

B. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,

cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

C. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,

such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and


ONTARIO, OR


fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are

accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment

operation.

D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and

balancing.

E. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,

belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

F. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

G. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

H. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

I. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete system readiness checks and submit a system readiness report to the Project Engineer.

Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this

Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and

balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.

Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent

identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-

control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

G. Check for airflow blockages.

H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

I. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

J. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

K. Manually adjust deflectors in slot diffusers to achieve horizontal airflow.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to plus 10 percent.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total

airflow.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct

restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,

rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-

recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower

than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units

for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate

the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust

submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the

dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the

Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.7 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder,

tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed by the testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the

final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of TAB firm.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's/Engineer's name and address.

6. Contractor's name and address.

7. Report date.

8. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.

9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each Section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

10. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

11. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated

values.

12. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

e. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Digital copy: Prepare a digital copy of the final report in PDF format, containing the same

information as the hard-copy report binder. Include digital bookmarks corresponding to

tabulated Sections of the hard copy binder.

3.8 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.

c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request

that a final inspection be made by Owner's representative.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of owner's representative.

3. Owner's representative shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final

report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total

measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a

normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,

proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final

inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


ONTARIO, OR


3.9 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that

balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak

summer and winter conditions.



ONTARIO, OR

PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1

SECTION 230700 - PLUMBING AND HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe, duct, and equipment insulation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value, thickness, jackets

(factory and field applied) and accessories.


A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation

including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or

other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label

insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.

1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50

or less.

2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of

150 or less.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section

230529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct

Installer for duct installation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain

clearance requirements for installation of insulation.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing of piping and duct systems.

B. Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Glass Fiber:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Knauf Fiberglass.

c. Manville/Schuller.

d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.

e. E-Insulation.

2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. IMCOA Corporation.

c. Rubatex Corporation.

3. Fire Protection System:

a. Certainteed Corporation.

b. Johns Manville.

c. Thermal Ceramics.

d. 3M Fire Barrier.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.

B. Jacket: All-service, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft

paper and aluminum foil skrim backing having pressure sensitive self-sealing lap.

C. Board: ASTM C 612, Class 2, semi-rigid jacketed board.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 average maximum, at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Density: 3.0 pcf average maximum.

D. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-2, jacketed flexible blankets.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at compressed thickness, at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Density: 0.75lb/cu. ft.

E. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, factory applied all-

service jacket with self seal lap.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Density: 5 lb/cu. ft average maximum.


ONTARIO, OR


F. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for

outside service.

2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR

A. Material: Flexible expanded closed-cell structure with smooth skin on both sides.

1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534, Type I.

2. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534, Type II.

B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 average maximum at 75 deg F.

C. Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with foil, scrim, kraft paper

jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating.

1. General: UL classified filler material, flame spread 5, smoke developed 5, R value per

ASTM C 518 - 4.5 at 70 deg F.

2. Physical Properties: Service range to 2300 deg F, melting point of 3200 deg F, color

white.

3. Foil Physical Properties: Puncture resistance - Beach 100 units minimum, tensile

strength M.D. 40 lbs/in2 width average, C.D. 40 lb/in2 width average, light reflectance

90.5percent.

4. System Components: Carbon steel banding, insulation pins and speed clips.

2.5 ADHESIVES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive

recommended by insulation manufacturer. Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class 1.

2.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. PVC Jacketing: High-impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC, 30-mils thick, roll stock ready for

shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

1. Mastic/Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

B. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 30-mil-thick, high-

impact, ultra-violet-resistant PVC.

1. Mastic around fitting to pipe insulation.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209, 3003 Alloy, H-14 temper, roll stock ready for shop or field

cutting and forming to indicated sizes.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.016-inch thick for interior applications and

0.020-inch thick for exterior applications.

2. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1 mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.

3. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3 mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.

4. Elbows: Preformed 45-degree and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, same

material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2.7 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Bands: 3/4-inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Aluminum: 0.007-inch thick.

2. 1/8-inch by 1/8-inch Rapid Penetrating point screws for non vapor barrier application.

B. Wire: 14 gauge nickel copper alloy, 16 gauge, soft-annealed stainless steel, or 160 gauge, soft-

annealed galvanized steel.

C. Cupped Head Weld Pins- 1-1/2-inch diameter cupped head, mild, annealed steel with zinc

plating.

D. Corner Angles: 28 gauge, 1 inch by 1 inch aluminum, adhered to 2-inch by 2-inch kraft paper.

E. Anchor Pins: Capable of supporting 20 pounds each. Provide anchor pins and speed washers

of sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation type and thickness.

F. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

G. Foil/Skrim/Kraft Tape: Vapor barrier tape with rubber adhesive and UL listed and 25/20 rated.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.

3. Adhesion: 85 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 5 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 45 lbf/inch in width.

2.8 SEALING COMPOUNDS-MASTIC

A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire-resistive composition.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum.

2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

B. Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor-barrier sealant designed to seal metal

joints.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum.

2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 deg F.

3. Color: Aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses

required for each mechanical system.

B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do

not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment where indicated and defined in

insulation service chart.

D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed

instructions.

E. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.

F. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a

vapor barrier.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following

systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner.

2. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes.

3. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.

4. Nameplates and data plates.

5. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems.

6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.

7. Backflow prevention device.


ONTARIO, OR


3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints.

B. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties.

C. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.

D. Apply insulation with all service jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, at least 3 inches wide, and of same material

as insulation jacket.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

4. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gauges, fill and seal voids with

mastic.

5. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material

around damaged jacket. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond

damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe.

E. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the

roof flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted

tightly to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof

flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with

vapor barrier coating.

F. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate insulation

flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor barrier coating.

G. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and

partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

H. Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-

rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around

penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer.

I. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top

of floor.

J. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with

mastic. Apply premolded, precut, or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges,

unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight.

1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation.

2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater.

3. Insulate elbows with blanket insulation inserts.

4. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal

circumferential joints with butt strips.


ONTARIO, OR


K. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments. For vapor barrier application piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum

of 12 inches and taper and seal insulation ends.

1. Install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with

adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Refer

to "Hangers and Supports" for thermal-hanger shield inserts.

2. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

3.4 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal exposed seams and joint ends, with mastic.

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Slip insulation on the pipe before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with

adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, use longitudinally precut insulation and

apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive.

B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to

valve, fitting, and flange and seal joints with adhesive.

1. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees.

2. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed

valves, fittings, and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation.

3.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Ensure insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment and to fit contours of

equipment. Stagger end joints.

B. Secure sections of insulation in place with bands spaced at 12-inch centers, except for flexible

elastomeric cellular insulation.

C. Finishing: Except for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, see Insulation schedule for

jacketing.

3.7 GLASS FIBER EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Secure insulation with anchor pins and speed washers.

B. Space anchors at maximum intervals of 18 inches in both directions and not more than 3 inches

from edges and joints.


ONTARIO, OR


3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install sheets of the largest manageable size.

B. Apply full coverage of adhesive to the surfaces of the equipment and to the insulation.

C. Butt insulation joints firmly together and apply adhesive to insulation edges at joints.

D. Coat exterior installations with manufacturer's coating and install by manufacturer's installation

instructions.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION

A. Install block and board insulation as follows:

1. Adhesive and Band Attachment: Secure block and board insulation tight and smooth

with at least 50 percent coverage of adhesive. Install bands spaced 12 inches apart.

Protect insulation under bands and at exterior corners with metal corner angles. Fill

joints, seams, and chipped edges with vapor barrier compound. Install metal corner

angles on all outside corners to provide a neat finished appearance.

2. Speed Washers or Weld Pins Attachment: Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed

washers or welded pin attachments. Space anchor pins 18 inches apart each way and 3

inches from insulation joints. Apply mastic to insulation in contact, open joints, breaks,

punctures, and voids in insulation.

B. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as

follows:

1. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way.

2. Overlap joints 3 inches.

3. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier tape, matching jacket material.

3.10 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. Install metal jacket with 2 inches overlap at longitudinal and butt joints. Overlap longitudinal

joints to shed water. Seal butt joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation

manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel draw bands 12 inches on center and at butt

joints.

B. Install the PVC jacket with 1 inch overlap at longitudinal and butt joints and seal with adhesive.

3.11 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of

manufacturer's recommended protective coating to exposed insulation.

B. Exterior insulated ductwork and equipment shall have a weatherproof coating applied over the

insulation.


ONTARIO, OR


3.12 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and

supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

3.13 INSULATION SCHEDULES

A. General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:

1. Field-Applied Jackets: PVC - PVC, A - Aluminum, SS - Stainless Steel, Glass Cloth.

2. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size.

3. Materials: GF - Glass Fiber, FE - Flexible Elastomeric, FPS - Fire Protection System.

B. Pipe Insulation:

APPLICATION NOMINAL

PIPE SIZE

INSULATION

MATERIAL

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

INSERTS

OR

SHIELDS

NOTE 1

VAPOR

BARRIER

FIELD

APPLIED

JACKET

DOMESTIC

COLD WATER

ALL GF, FE 1 NO YES NONE

RAIN WATER

AND

OVERFLOW

ALL GF 1 NO NO NONE

DOMESTIC

HOT WATER

< 1-1/2 GF, FE 1 NO NO NONE

DOMESTIC

HOT WATER

1-1/2 - 4 GF, FE 1-1/2 NO NO NONE

DOMESTIC HW

RECIRC.

ALL GF, FE

1-1/2

NO NO NONE

PLUMBING

VENTS WITHIN

6 FT OF ROOF

OUTLET

ALL GF 1 NO NO NONE

INSIDE

BUILDING,

CONCEALED

REFRIGERANT

ALL FE 1 NO NO NONE


ONTARIO, OR


APPLICATION NOMINAL

PIPE SIZE

INSULATION

MATERIAL

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

INSERTS

OR

SHIELDS

NOTE 1

VAPOR

BARRIER

FIELD

APPLIED

JACKET

SUCTION, HOT

GAS AND

LIQUID

INSIDE

BUILDING,

EXPOSED

REFRIGERANT

SUCTION, HOT

GAS AND

LIQUID

ALL FE 1 NO NO COLOR

PVC

ROOF

MOUNTED,

EXTERIOR

REFRIGERANT

SUCTION, HOT

GAS AND

LIQUID

ALL FE 1 NO NO ALUM

C. Equipment Insulation:

APPLICATION TYPE INSULATION

MATERIAL

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

VAPOR

BARRIER

FIELD

APPLIED

JACKET

ROOF DRAIN BOWLS AND

PANS

BLANKET GF 1-1/2 YES NONE

D. Duct Systems:

APPLICATION TYPE INSULATION

MATERIAL

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

VAPOR

BARRIER

FIELD

APPLIED

JACKET

EXPOSED SUPPLY AND

RETURN DUCTWORK

(INTERIOR)

NONE NONE N/A N/A N/A

EXHAUST / RELIEF

DUCTWORK NOT

ASSOCIATED WITH A

HEAT RECOVERY UNIT.

NONE NONE N/A N/A N/A


ONTARIO, OR


CONCEALED SUPPLY AND

RETURN (INTERIOR)

BLANKET GF R-6 YES NONE

ALL DUCTWORK

UPSTREAM AND

DOWNSTREAM OF A

HEAT RECOVERY UNIT

(INTERIOR)

BLANKET GF R-6 YES NONE

SUPPLY AND RETURN

(EXTERIOR)

BOARD GF R-8 YES SAJ

RANGE HOOD EXHAUST

SEE FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 - 1

SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and

equipment.

B. Commissioning process shall be executed in accordance with the requirements of Section C408

of the 2012 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). Nothing in this Specification shall

be construed as allowing a commissioning process that does not comply with the IECC

requirements.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC."

D. This Section includes work to be performed by the CxA, the Mechanical Contractor, and others.

The Mechanical Contractor and their subcontractors and suppliers must coordinate all work

with CxA as required.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of

resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.

C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.

D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or

separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

E. IECC: The 2015 International Energy Conservation Code.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.

C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in HVAC&R system, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance

orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Provide information requested by the CxA for commissioning documentation. Information to be

provided includes but is not limited to:

1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and

reports.

2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including

design changes that occurred during the construction phase.

3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart

and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to

be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup

procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and

associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates.

7. Corrective action documents.

8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data

acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test

period. Install devices as requested by CxA.

1.4 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Prepare the commissioning plan, preliminary commissioning report, and final commissioning

report.

B. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for

actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed

as part of the construction contract.

C. Direct commissioning testing.

D. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.

E. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.

1.5 COMMISSIONING PLAN

A. The CxA shall prepare a commissioning plan in accordance with the requirements of IECC

Section C408.2.1.

1. Submit a copy of the plan at least one week prior to the intended start date of

commissioning tests and procedures.

B. The Commissioning plan shall include, at a minimum

1. A narrative description of the activities that will be accomplished during each phase of

commissioning, including the personnel intended to accomplish each of the activities.


ONTARIO, OR


2. A listing of the specific equipment, appliances or systems to be tested and a description

of the tests to be performed.

3. Functions to be tested, including but not limited to calibrations and economizer controls.

4. Conditions under which the test will be performed. At a minimum, testing shall affirm

winter and summer design conditions and full outside air conditions.

5. Measurable criteria for performance.

1.6 PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING REPORT

A. The CxA shall prepare a Preliminary Commissioning Report in accordance with the

requirements of IECC Section C408.2.4. At a minimum, the report shall identify:

1. Itemization of deficiencies found during testing that have not been corrected at the time

of report preparation

2. Deferred tests that cannot be performed at the time of report preparation because of

climatic conditions.

3. Climatic conditions required for performance of the deferred test.

1.7 FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT

A. The CxA shall prepare a Final Commissioning Report in accordance with the requirements of

IECC Section C408.2.5.4. At a minimum the report shall include:

1. Results of functional performance tests.

2. Disposition of deficiencies found during testing including details of corrective measures

used or proposed.

3. Functional performance test procedures used during the commissioning process including

measurable criteria for test acceptance.

4. Description of any tests that were deferred to a later time due to climatic conditions.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of readiness.

B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.

C. Commissioning Plan.

D. Preliminary Commissioning Report.

E. Final Commissioning Report.


ONTARIO, OR



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and

started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and

calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set

points have been recorded.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing,

adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective

work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal

shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power,

and alarm conditions).

E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Contractor shall install measuring instruments and logging devices to

record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 TESTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms,

checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least 7 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for

the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R

systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor 7 days in advance of the date of

field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.

2. The testing and balancing Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial

number) that were used when original data were collected.

3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent.

Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing,

adjusting, and balancing report. Variations in background noise must be considered.

4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be

performed.


ONTARIO, OR


3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of

the CxA.

B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment

for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space.

Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control

functions.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or

emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers

and sensors.

D. The CxA, with input from the Mechanical Contractor, testing and balancing Contractor, and

Temperature Controls Contractor, shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and

checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to

test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments.

Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and

document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal

operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or

simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system,

document the deficiency and report it to the Engineer. After deficiencies are resolved,

reschedule tests.

J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance

tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.4 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Contractor shall assist the CxA with preparation

of testing plans to ensure that equipment is operating per the

B. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are

specified in Division 23 piping Sections. Mechanical Contractor shall prepare a pipe system

cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating

plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified

by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for


ONTARIO, OR


each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section.

Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of

piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning,

flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.

3. Minimum flushing water velocity.

4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,

flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

C. HVAC&R System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test

performance of HVAC&R systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and

testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

D. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test

performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.



ONTARIO, OR

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

B. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Temperature Control

(TC) Contractor.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for the HVAC systems and components, including

control components for equipment that is not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Temperature Control

(TC) Contractor.

1.3 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any

special software from the manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal. The primary

point of interface on these PC's will be a standard Web Browser.

B. The TC Contractor work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,

software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring,

tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals,

testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping,

handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning,

cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically

mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional

and commissioned BAS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples:

1. At a minimum, submit the following:

a. BAS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.

b. Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.

c. Points schedule for each point in the BAS, including: Point Type, Object Name,

Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller type, and Address.


ONTARIO, OR


d. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus.

e. Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying quantities,

part numbers, descriptions, and optional features.

f. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper provided

under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: Code

Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size,

Mounting, and Actuator Type.

g. Details of all BAS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.

h. Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and

description for all products including software.

1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Three (3) digital copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to

the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and

Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on flash drive media, and include the following

for the BAS provided:

a. Table of contents.

b. As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record

drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all

information supplied with the approved submittal.

c. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including

software.

d. System Operator's manuals.

e. Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences.

f. BAS network diagrams.

g. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.

h. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include

all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically

organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all

product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom,

and search all documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS) GENERAL

A. The FMS shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi-vendor environment. To

accomplish this effectively, all Network Controllers shall support open communication protocol

standards and integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications. The system shall

be designed for use on the Internet, or intranets using off the shelf, industry standard

technology compatible with other owner provided networks.

B. The FMS shall consist of the following:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Standalone Network Controller(s).

2. Custom Application Controller(s).

3. Input/Output Module(s).

4. Local Display Device(s).

5. Distributed User Interface(s).

6. Network processing, data storage and communications equipment.

7. Other components required for a complete and working FMS.

C. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and

functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices.

D. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm

reporting and control execution. The failure of any single component or network connection

shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

2.2 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. Automation Network:

1. The automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet TCP/IP.

Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard "off the shelf" products available

through normal PC vendor channels.

2. The FMS shall network multiple user interface clients, automation engines, system

controllers and application-specific controllers. Provide application and data server(s) as

required for systems operation.

3. The automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication speed of 100

Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network communication.

4. Network Controllers shall reside on the automation network.

5. The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks. Where

indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and share

resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices.

6. Java-based systems are not acceptable.

B. Control Network:

1. Network Controllers shall provide supervisory control over the control network and shall

support the following communication protocol:

a. BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9.

2. Control networks shall provide either "Peer-to-Peer," Master-Slave, or Supervised Token

Passing communications, and shall operate at a minimum communication speed of 9600

baud.

3. DDC Controllers shall reside on the control network.

4. Control network communication protocol shall be BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus

Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135.

5. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for each

controller device (master or slave) that will communicate on the BACnet MS/TP Bus.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Integration:

1. Hardwired:

a. Analog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to another via

hardwired connections.

b. There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point to be

integrated between the systems.

2. Direct Protocol (Integrator Panel):

a. The FMS shall include appropriate hardware equipment and software to allow bi-

directional data communications between the FMS and 3rd party manufacturers'

control panels. The FMS shall receive, react to, and return information from

multiple building systems, including but not limited to the chillers, boilers,

variable frequency drives, power monitoring system, and medical gas.

b. All data required by the application shall be mapped into the Network Controller

database, and shall be transparent to the operator.

c. Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-time

interoperability with FMS software features such as: Control Software, Energy

Management, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data

and Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Local Area Network Communications.

3. BACnet Protocol Integration - BACnet:

a. The neutral protocol used between systems will be BACnet over Ethernet and

comply with the ASHRAE BACnet standard 135-2003.

b. A complete Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be

provided for all BACnet system devices.

c. The ability to command, share point object data, change of state (COS) data and

schedules between the host and BACnet systems shall be provided.

2.3 USER INTERFACE

A. Dedicated Web Based User Interface: Utilize a standard PC web browser.

B. Distributed Web Based User Interface:

1. All features and functions of the dedicated user interface previously defined in this

document shall be available on any computer connected directly or via a wide area or

virtual private network (WAN/VPN) to the automation network and conforming to the

following specifications.

2. The software shall run on the Microsoft Internet Explorer (11.0 or higher) browser.

3. Java-based systems will not be allowed.

C. User Interface Application Components:

1. The operation of the control system shall be independent of the user interface, which

shall be used for operator communications only. Systems that rely on an operator


ONTARIO, OR


workstation to provide supervisory control over controller execution of the sequences of

operations or system communications shall not be acceptable.

2. Alarms:

a. Alarms shall be routed directly from Network Controllers to PCs and servers. It

shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific

PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the user interface shall, at the

minimum, provide the following functions:

1) Log date and time of alarm occurrence.

2) Generate a "Pop-Up" window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an

alarm has been received.

3) Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge,

temporarily silence, or discard an alarm.

4) Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user

acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall

include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a

time/date stamp.

5) Provide the ability to send alarms requiring acknowledgment at the user

interface, and / or direct alarms to an e-mail address and/or text messaging.

6) Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an

alarm.

3. Schedules:

a. A graphical display for time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of

building operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall

be provided:

1) Weekly Schedules.

2) Exception Schedules.

3) Monthly Calendars.

b. Weekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific

time use schedule.

c. It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule

including references to calendars.

d. Monthly calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of

holidays and special days for a minimum of five years in advance. Holidays and

special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall

automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the

exception schedules.

4. Password:

a. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the

user/manager to user interface control, display, and database manipulation

capabilities deemed appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password.

b. Each user shall have the following: a user name, a password, and access levels.


ONTARIO, OR


5. Dynamic Color Graphics:

a. The graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User

Interface. Browser or Workstation applications that rely only upon HTML pages

shall not be acceptable.

b. The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime

function. The system architecture shall support an unlimited number of graphics

documents (graphic definition files) to be generated and executed.

c. The graphics shall be able to display and provide animation based on real-time

data that is acquired, derived, or entered.

d. Graphics Runtime Functions: A maximum of 16 graphic applications shall be able

to execute at any one time on a user interface or workstation with 4 visible to the

user. Each graphic application shall be capable of the following functions:

1) All graphics shall be fully scalable.

2) The graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio.

3) Multiple fonts shall be supported.

4) Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis.

5) The color of all animations and values on displays shall indicate if the status

of the object attribute.

e. Operation from Graphics: It shall be possible to change values (setpoints) and

states in system controlled equipment by using drop-down windows accessible via

the pointing device.

f. Graphic Editing Tool: A graphic editing tool shall be provided that allows for the

creation and editing of graphic files. The graphic editor shall be capable of

performing/defining all animations, and defining all runtime binding.

1) The graphic editing tool shall in general provide for the creation and

positioning of point objects by dragging from tool bars or drop-downs and

positioning where required.

2) In addition, the graphic editing tool shall be able to add additional content

to any graphic by importing backgrounds in the SVG, BMP or JPG file

formats.

g. Historical trending and data collection.

h. Each Automation Engine shall store trend and point history data for all analog and

digital inputs and outputs, as follows:

1) Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending.

2) Each Automation Engine shall have the capability to store multiple samples

for each physical point and software variable based upon available memory,

including an individual sample time/date stamp. Points may be assigned to

multiple history trends with different collection parameters.

6. Trend Data Viewing and Analysis:

a. Provide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points.

b. It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and

reports by specifying the point name and associated trend name.


ONTARIO, OR


c. The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to define trend study displays to

include multiple trends.

d. Displays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable

display characteristics, such as ranging, color, and plot style.

e. Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time

without reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. This is a zoom

capability.

f. Display magnitude shall automatically be scaled to show full graphic resolution of

the data being displayed.

g. Trend studies shall be capable of calculating and displaying calculated variables

including highest value, lowest value and time based accumulation.

2.4 NETWORK CONTROLLERS (NWC)

A. Network Controllers:

1. The Network Controller (NWC) shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory

controller. The NWC shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific

controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer

basis with other Network Controllers.

2. Automation Network: The NWC shall reside on the automation network and shall

support a subnet of system controllers.

3. User Interface: Each NWC shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface

(UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the

automation network shall have access to the web based UI.

a. The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the NWC or Web Server.

Systems that require a local copy of the system database on the user's personal

computer are not acceptable.

b. The NWC shall support a minimum of two concurrent users.

c. The web based user shall have the capability to access all system data through the

workstation.

d. Remote users connected to the network through an Internet Service Provider (ISP)

shall also have limited or total system access based on the password matrix.

e. The NWC shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics.

f. Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database or require the graphics

to reside on the user's personal computer are not acceptable.

g. Systems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not

acceptable.

4. Processor: The NWC shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32

bits. The NWC shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control

processor. Standard operating systems shall be employed. NWC size and capability shall

be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification.

5. Memory: Each NWC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system,

databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control level

devices.

6. Hardware Real Time Clock: The NWC shall include an integrated, hardware-based,

real-time clock.


ONTARIO, OR


7. Communications Ports: The NWC shall provide LON or BACnet communication ports

and ports for operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry-standard

computers, modems, and portable operator's terminals.

8. Diagnostics: The NWC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication

diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Network Controller shall provide

both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery

conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.

9. Power Failure: In the event of the loss of normal power, the NWC shall continue to

operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall be an

orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system

software.

a. During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal

system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved into

Flash memory.

b. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the

controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention

through a normal soft-start sequence.

10. Certification: The NWC shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

11. Controller Network: The NWC shall support the following communication protocols on

the controller network:

a. The NWC shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-

135, Clause 9 on the controller network.

1) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be

provided for each controller device (master or slave) that will communicate

on the BACnet MS/TP Bus.

2) The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 day prior to bidding.

3) The NWC shall support a minimum of 100 control devices.

2.5 DDC SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

A. Custom Application Controllers (CAC):

1. The Custom Application Controller (CAC) shall be a fully user-programmable, digital

controller that communicates via BACnet MS/TP protocol.

2. Controllers shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm

that senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning

parameters appropriately.

3. The CAC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points.

4. The CAC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:

a. Universal Inputs shall be configured to monitor any of the following:

1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode.

2) Analog Input, Current Mode.

3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode.


ONTARIO, OR


4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode.

5) Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode.

b. Binary Inputs shall be configured to monitor either of the following:

1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode.

2) Pulse Counter Mode.

c. Analog Outputs shall be configured to output either of the following:

1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode.

2) Analog Output, Current Mode.

d. Binary Outputs shall output the following:

1) 24 VAC Triac.

e. Configurable Outputs shall be capable of the following:

1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode.

2) Binary Output Mode.

5. The CAC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving

direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the field

bus.

6. The CAC shall support, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Hot water, chilled water/central plant applications.

b. Built-up air handling units for special applications.

c. Terminal units.

d. Special programs as required for systems control.

B. Third Party BACnet Monitoring:

1. All controls interface critical to the operation of equipment shall be hard-wired to the DDC

system. Including but not limited to HVAC equipment, chillers, boilers, variable frequency

drives, power monitoring systems, and medical gas systems.

2. Upon a loss of network communications, the equipment shall continue to operate in a stand-

alone mode.

3. When 3rd party BACnet communication is required, a BACnet connection shall be used to

acquire additional operational and monitoring parameters not critical to the control of the

equipment. BACnet IP communication is preferred. If serial communications are used, a

serial-to-Ethernet converter will be required. If Modbus communications are used, a

Modbus-to-BACnet converter will be required.

2.6 FIELD DEVICES

A. Networked Thermostats:


ONTARIO, OR


1. The Networked Thermostats shall be capable of controlling the following:

a. Rooftop units - see sequence of operations on drawings.

b. Cabinet heaters or unit heaters.

c. Finned-tube radiation.

2. The Networked Thermostat shall communicate over the Field Controller Bus.

a. The Networked Thermostat shall support remote read/write and parameter

adjustment from the web based User Interfaceable through a Network Controller.

3. The Networked Thermostat shall include an intuitive User Interface providing plain text

messages with backlit display.

4. The Networked Thermostats shall provide the flexibility to support the following inputs:

a. Integral Indoor Air Temperature Sensor.

b. Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor.

c. Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED

Indicator.

d. Two configurable binary inputs.

5. The Networked Thermostats shall provide the flexibility to support the following

outputs:

a. Three Speed Fan Control.

b. On/Off Control.

c. Floating Control.

d. Proportional (0 to 10V) Control.

6. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to adjust the following

parameters:

a. Adjustable Temporary Occupancy from 0 to 24 hours.

b. Adjustable heating/cooling deadband from 2 deg F to 5 deg F.

c. Adjustable heating/cooling cycles per hour from 4 to 8.

7. The Networked Thermostat shall employ nonvolatile electrically erasable programmable

read-only memory (EEPROM) for all adjustable parameters.

B. Network Sensors (NS):

1. The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as

required by the systems sequence of operations:

a. Zone temperature.

b. Zone setpoint.

2. The NS shall transmit the zone information back to the controller on the Sensor-Actuator

Bus (SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9 or Lon Bus.

3. The Network Sensors shall include the following items:


ONTARIO, OR


a. A backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to indicate the Temperature, Humidity

and Setpoint.

b. An LED to indicate the status of the override feature.

c. A button to initiate a timed override command.

4. The NS shall have a phone jack connection.

2.7 INPUT DEVICES

A. General Requirements:

1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices

shall be provided to meet the system requirements.

B. Temperature Sensors:

1. General Requirements:

a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output

summary and sequence of operations.

b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type RTDs or Thermistors.

c. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their

associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire,

and A to D conversion:

Point Type Accuracy

Room Temp + .5 deg F.

Duct Temperature + .5 deg F.

All Others + .75 deg F.

2. Vandal Proof Room Temperature Sensors:

a. Room sensors shall be constructed for wall box mounting.

3. Standard Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Display:

a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.

b. Room sensors shall have an integral LCD display and keypad with the following

capabilities:

1) Display room temperatures.

2) Display and adjust room comfort setpoint.

3) Timed override request push button with LED status for activation of after-

hours operation.

4. Outside Air Sensors:


ONTARIO, OR


a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to

which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield.

b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate

that surrounds the sensor element.

c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient

temperatures.

5. Duct Mount Sensors:

a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct,

and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly,

including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof

cover and gasket shall be used.

6. Averaging Sensors:

a. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches and/or where air

temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points

shall be used.

b. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of

sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification

and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing

points per 12-foot long segment.

c. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing

string.

C. Differential Pressure Transmitters:

1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:

a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100 percent pressure over-

range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a

momentary 40 percent over-range input.

b. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA

output signal.

c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the

flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut-off valves in

the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and

Owner permanent, easy-to-use connection.

d. A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter.

Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels.

D. Status and Safety Switches:


a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and

generate alarms at the FMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety


ONTARIO, OR


switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to

shut down respective equipment.

2. Current Sensing Switches:

a. The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a

dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current

sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED

indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the

window of the device. It shall accept over-current up to twice its trip point range.

b. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other

miscellaneous motor loads.

c. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only

when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or

coupling shall indicate a negative run status.

3. Low Temperature Limit Switches:

a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double

Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC.

b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 feet in length and shall react to the

coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in

accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures.

c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of

the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full

protection of the air stream.

d. The low temperature limit switch shall be equal to Johnson Controls A70.

2.8 OUTPUT DEVICES

A. Actuators:


a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic.

2. Electronic Damper Actuators:

a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount.

b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the

sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on actuator

manufacturer's recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and

damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall

permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All

actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return

unless otherwise specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have

external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction, and a gear release to

allow manual positioning.


ONTARIO, OR


c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no

more than 15 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20

mA.

B. Control Dampers: Furnished by Sheet Metal Contractor.

1. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers. All automatic dampers

shall be sized for the application by the Contractor or as specifically indicated on the

Drawings.

2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for

normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so

that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure

drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear.

3. All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type

arranged for normally open or closed operation, as required.

4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum.

Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60 inches. Damper blades shall be 16-

gauge minimum and shall not exceed eight (8) inches in width. Damper frames shall be

16-gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. All damper bearings shall be

made of reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be

tight closing, low leakage type, with synthetic elastomeric seals on the blade edges and

flexible stainless steel side seals. Dampers of 48 inch by 48 inch size shall not leak in

excess of 8.0 cfm per square foot when closed against 4 inch w.g. static pressure when

tested in accordance with AMCA Std. 500.

5. Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall

be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or system pressure

exceeds 2.5 inch w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6 inch w.g.

6. One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with

face velocities of 1500 FPM or below.

7. Multiple section dampers may be jack-shafted to allow mounting of piston pneumatic

actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the jackshaft shall receive

at least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist.

C. Control Relays:

1. Control Pilot Relays:

a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or

clips.

b. Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount.

c. DPDT, 3 PDT, or 4 PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application.

d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120 VAC.

e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.

D. Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers:

1. A signal isolation transducer shall be provided whenever an analog output signal from

the FMS is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a chiller

control panel), or is to receive as an input signal from a remote system.

2. The signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation between systems.


ONTARIO, OR


3. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Local Control Panels:

1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the Temperature Control

manufacturer's standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected

and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels

shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.

2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as

specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices—such as relays, transducers, and so

forth that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function.

Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless

otherwise noted.

3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw

terminals.

4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring

shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.

5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.

6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused

on/off power switch, and required transformers.

B. Power Supplies:

1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall

not exceed 75 percent of the rated capacity of the power supply.

2. Input: 120 VAC +10 percent, 60Hz.

3. Output: 24 VDC.

4. Line Regulation: +0.05 percent for 10 percent line change.

5. Load Regulation: +0.05 percent for 50 percent load change.

6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak.

7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the

power supply.

8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.

PART 3 - PERFORMANCE / EXECUTION

3.1 FMS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install all control equipment including motorized dampers, valves and actuators

according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Programming: Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as required to

satisfy the sequence of operation. Programming and adjustments required during the building

startup and warranty period shall be provided at no additional cost.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Graphic Displays:

1. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all points as

indicated on the point list. All terminal unit graphic displays shall be from a standard

design library. At a minimum provide graphics for the following:

a. Floor Plan views with all zones indicated. Provide colored shading to provide

indication of zone temperature difference from set point.

b. Air handler views showing all components of air handling system including

dampers, valves, fans, coils, filters and related building exhaust and/or relief

systems. The graphics shall include all points to related to each controlled device.

2. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme

and/or menu selection.

D. Actuation/Control Type:

1. Actuator Application:

a. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.

b. All modulating damper and valve actuators shall be - 0 10 vdc proportional.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. FMS Wiring:

1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of

the Facility Management System including power wiring for all controllers shall be

provided by the TC Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings

under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of

applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless

specified otherwise in this Section.

2. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the

design responsibility of the TC Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the

incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the TC Contractor,

the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected

components.

3. Class 2 Wiring:

a. All Class 2 (24 VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise

specified.

b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class

2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5 feet from the building

structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be

installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in

accordance with local code requirements.

4. Class 2 signal wiring and 24 VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring

120 VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.


ONTARIO, OR


5. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables,

panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and

conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

B. FMS Line Voltage Power Source:

1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Facility Management System shall be taken from

existing panel boards and circuit breakers. Power for building automation system

controls is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor.

C. FMS Raceway:

1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this

specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2-inch.

2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway

(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.

3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building

lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet

in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used

within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.

D. Penetrations:

1. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated FMS conduits and raceways.

2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using

approved fire resistive sealant.

3. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed

raceway.

4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true,

and square.

E. FMS Identification Standards:

1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the

enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.

2. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and

troubleshooting.

F. FMS Panel Installation:

1. The FMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than

three feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be

anchored per the manufacturer's recommendations.

2. The FMS Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other

trades and electrical and Mechanical Contractors.

G. HVAC Input Devices - General:

1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Locate components of the FMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells,

pressure taps, airflow stations, etc.

4. Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME

guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.

5. Outside Air Sensors:

a. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover, mounted on the

North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake

flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately.

6. Space Sensors:

a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements.

b. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on

the Plans.

7. Low Temperature Limit Switches:

a. Install on the discharge side of the first water coil in the air stream.

b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring each

square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor.

c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of

the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of

the air stream.

3.3 TRAINING

A. The TC Contractor shall provide the following training services:

1. One day of on-site training by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the

specific installation details of the Project shall be performed following substantial

completion of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of

the project as-built drawings, the FMS software layout and naming conventions, and a

walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.

2. One day of additional training shall be given one month prior to the end of 1 year

warranty period.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Sequence Verification: The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative or the engineer

when the systems are performing as specified in the Sequence of Operation. Instruct the

engineer on access to the building's control system and provide with proper username and

password to verify that all systems are operating as specified. At the engineer's request the

Control Contractor shall demonstrate that specific sequences are operating as intended. Include

a minimum of 8 hours of on site time with the engineer verifying systems operation. The

Control Contractor shall simulate conditions and change set points as directed by the engineer


ONTARIO, OR


to prove compliance. Make changes as required to meet the sequence of operation and at

conclusion of sequence verification process, initiate point trending as directed by the engineer.

All software changes needed for proper system operation during the warranty period shall be

made at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Remote Monitoring: The Contractor shall provide labor to insure engineer can monitor the

temperature control system from the Engineer's office.

C. Point Trending: The Temperature Control Contractor shall set up trending on any point

requested by the engineer to verify that control loops are operating as intended and meets the

design intent. At a minimum provide trends for a one week time period for the following

points:

1. Space Temperatures (+/- 1 deg of Setpoint) at 10 minute intervals.

2. Duct Static Pressure (+/- 10 percent of control range) at 1 minute intervals.

3. Heating Water Temperatures (+/- 2 deg F of setpoint) at 5 minute intervals.

4. Differential Water Pressure for Pump Control (+/- 10 percent of control range) at 1

minute intervals.

5. Equipment Staging (ON/ OFF status) at 5 minute intervals.

6. Economizer Modulation (percent open) at 1 minute intervals.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1

SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by which controls function.

Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified in this Section.

1.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the

Owner's Representative upon completion of the project.

a. Table of contents.

b. As-built system record drawings.

c. System Operator's manuals.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HVAC SYSTEM CONTROL SEQUENCES - See Sequences on Drawing M302.

3.2 CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Startup Testing: Provide Owner Representative and Engineer with schedule for startup testing.

Owner's Representative shall be present during any or all startup testing activities. Complete

startup testing and verify operational control of system before notifying Owner of system

demonstration.

1. Calibrate and prepare for service each instrument, control, and accessory equipment

furnished within Division 23.

2. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults.

Verify that terminations are tight.

3. Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each device

according to manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators

and control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal positions are

correct.

5. Verify that analog output devices such as I/Ps and actuators are functional, that start and

span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check control valves


ONTARIO, OR

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 2

and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make necessary adjustments

to valve stem and damper blade travel.

6. Prepare a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with

technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated.

7. Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and observe

each operational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules.

8. Alarms and Interlocks:

a. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.

b. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail

in the proper direction.

c. Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of

variable and interlock action.

3.3 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Demonstration: Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to demonstrate

system operation and compliance with specification after and in addition to tests specified in

Division 23 (Checkout and Testing). Provide Engineer with log documenting completion of

startup tests.

1. Engineer will be present to observe and review system demonstration. Notify Engineer at

least 10 days before system demonstration begins.

2. Demonstration shall follow process outlined herein. Complete approved checklists and

forms for each system as part of system demonstration.

3. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified in Division

23. Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication. Demonstrate

calibration and response of any input and output points requested by Engineer. Provide

and operate test equipment required to prove proper system operation.

4. Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode.

5. Demonstrate each of the following:

6. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after Contractor

makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete

each test.

B. Acceptance: System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists

are submitted and approved (Submittals).

C. Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done.



ONTARIO, OR

NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 - NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.

3. Piping and tubing joining materials.

4. Valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,

unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied

spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

A. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is

more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or

less.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models.

3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.



A. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging

coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact

utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and

facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.


ONTARIO, OR


d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.

3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.

4. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.

5. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.

6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

7. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently

marked on valve body.


ONTARIO, OR


B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME

B16.38.


2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.

3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Ball: Brass.

3. Stem: Brass; blowout proof.

4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.


8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 SERVICE METERS (FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY UTILITY)

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg FEnd Connections: Solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.7 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.



the following:

a. Actaris.

b. American Meter Company.

c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.

d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.

e. Invensys.

f. Maxitrol Company.

g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port.

6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.

7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.

11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.

12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.



the following:

a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.

b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.

c. Harper Wyman Co.

d. Maxitrol Company.

e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.

6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.

8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by


9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization

devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.


ONTARIO, OR


L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for

roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including

service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install

where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.

Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and

same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or

cap.

N. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or

floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

O. Concealed Location Installations:

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be

installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from

physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker

barriers.

3. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash

chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator

shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side

down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each

piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated

valve.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.


ONTARIO, OR



A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel

tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

3.5 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal




D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and

welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas

service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers

and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum

rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch.

2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch.

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2-inch.


ONTARIO, OR


3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment

grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within

72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and

appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as

practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping

and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,

earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or

protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Color: To match building exterior colors and white when exposed on the roof.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and

by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



ONTARIO, OR


3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:


2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.13 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND

LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1.5 inches and smaller shall be the following:


B. Aboveground, distribution piping larger than 1.5 inches shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

3.14 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:


2. Bronze plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.




ONTARIO, OR

REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product listed.

B. Refer to Specification Section 238128 "Variable Refrigerant Volume and Split-System

Air-Conditioning Units" for information regarding VRF system shop drawings.

C. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance

manuals specified in Division 01.


A. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."

C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components

and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with

other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system

components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 07 Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

D. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Refrigerants:

a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.

b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div.

d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.

2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air

Conditioning Division.

b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.

c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.

d. Henry Valve Company.

e. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings and Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1silver.

E. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze core, high-

tensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections: dehydrated, pressure tested,

minimum 7 inches long.

2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or stainless-

steel core, high-tensile bronze brade covering, with solder end connections and synthetic

covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 7 inches long.


ONTARIO, OR


2.4 REFRIGERANTS

A. Adhere to variable refrigerant flow system manufacturer listed type and quantity.

B. Only HFC refrigerants allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.


A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results

for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install

valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit

installation of full-thickness insulation.

F. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be

exposed to mechanical injury.

G. Install piping in strict accordance with VRF manufacturer's installation requirements.

H. Install union to allow at connections to compressors and evaporators.

I. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats,

and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near

expansion valve bulb.

J. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports

for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch.

2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch.

3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4-inch.



ONTARIO, OR



6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8-inch.

L. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Braze joints according to Section 230500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC

Equipment."

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas nitrogen or carbon dioxide during brazing to prevent scale

formation.


A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.

2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the

design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of

system.

a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution

over joint.

c. Fill and pressure test refrigerant piping system per VRF manufacturers suggested

installation instructions.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and test piping in strict accordance with VRF manufacturer's written installation

instructions.



ONTARIO, OR

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Duct liner.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.

1.4 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide an installed duct system which will supply the air quantities indicated by the Drawings

and have the lowest possible friction loss with the least possible leakage loss. System static

pressure loss for each system shall not exceed that which is indicated in the equipment schedule

as external static pressure or in the fan schedule as static pressure and shall include the losses of

all accessories. Friction losses shall be minimized by reduction in the number of offsets and

elbows by pre-planning the duct system installation and coordination with other trades to

prevent interferences. Maintain access to accessories requiring maintenance, service, and

inspection. Radius elbows are preferred for turns to minimize friction, noise, and vibrations,

and especially for sections having large volume or higher velocities and sections which may

have turbulence.

B. Provide and/or construct materials, ductwork, joints, transformations, splitters, dampers, and

access doors as specified herein for the sheet metal ductwork as shown on Drawings.


A. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


product selection:




2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for

concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville.

c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Owens Corning.

2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent

erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: 1 inch.

b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.

c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.


ONTARIO, OR


e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner

when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in

duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.

2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without

projecting more than 1/8-inch into airstream.

3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard

classification of duct liner system.

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant is not limited to materials of adhesive or

mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: Not acceptable.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and

modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,

airtight seal.

D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light

when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized

butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.


A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or

galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted

with zinc-chromate primer.

B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction

according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and

complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod

applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint

reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Nexus Inc.

c. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Lockformer.

2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. Longitudinal

Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant (only on all medium and

high pressure ductwork).

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 12 inches and larger

and 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area.

E. Transitions:

1. Do not exceed 1 inch in 7 inches of slope for increase-in-area transitions.

2. Do not exceed 1 inch in 4 inches of slope for decrease-in-area transitions, 1 inch in

7 inches is preferable.

3. Do not exceed 45 degrees on the entering or leaving side for angle of transitions at

connections to equipment without the use of approved vanes.

F. Elbows:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Fabricate ells using one of the following Specifications: The fabrication methods are

listed in order of preference. Use radius elbows wherever possible. Use square elbows

only when available space prevents the use of radius elbows.

a. Unvaned, long radius elbow with the throat radius equal to 3/4 of the width of the

duct and with a full heel radius.

b. 6-inch throat radius with full radius, single thickness vanes and full heel radius.

c. Square elbows with airfoil, double thickness turning vanes.

d. Maximum unsupported length of vanes shall be 36 inches. Securely fasten vanes

to runners. Secure vanes in stable position. Construct vane edges to project

tangents parallel to duct sides.

2. Turning Vanes:

a. True airfoil design; smoothly-rounded entry nose with extended trailing edge.

Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 decibels in band 4 at 2000 FPM

in a 24-inch by 24-inch duct.

b. Manufacturer: Equal to Aero/Dyne Co., High Efficiency Profile, HEP. Contact

Aero/Dyne Co. at 1215 High Street, Suite 103, Auburn, CA 95603. (Telephone

#800-522-2423).

c. Fabricate assemblies with side rails; install vanes on design centers of 2.4 inches

across the full diagonal dimension of the elbow.

d. Submit manufacturer's product data for review.

G. Branch Connections:

1. Pressure Classification 2 Inches and Less:

a. Rectangular branch from rectangular main: 45 degree entry with all corners closed

as shown in Figure 4-6.

b. Round branches: High-efficiency take-offs if shown on Drawings, otherwise use

spin-in fitting without scoop.

c. Parallel flow branches: See Figure 4-5.

d. Space duct joints to avoid cutting them for branch take offs and outlet collars.

2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive

coverage at liner contact surface area.

B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge

overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.


ONTARIO, OR


F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding

12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding

18 inches longitudinally.

G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either

channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the

following locations:

1. Fan discharges.

2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than

2500 fpm or where indicated.

2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a

circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B. Round, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

1. Manufacturers:

a. Accu-Duct.

b. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

c. Norlock.

d. Omniduct.

e. SEMCO Incorporated.

f. Ventline.

g. Sheet Metal Contractors, Inc.

C. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before

and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two

internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2) Lindlab Inc.

3) McGill AirFlow Corporation.

4) SEMCO Incorporated.

5) Sheet Metal Contractors, Inc.

D. 90 Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for

longitudinal-seam straight ducts. Tees shall be conical. Saddle taps or straight tees shall not be

used.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess

material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

F. Two piece mitered elbows shall not be used.

G. The leading edge of all vanes in ducts over 20-inch diameter is to be hemmed with 1/2-inch

foldback. Turning vanes in ducts over 24 inches are to be reinforced by stays or sectional

construction to limit unsupported length to 24 inches. Vanes shall be minimum of 20 gauge.

H. Reduction of divided flow fittings to conical span section in the 36 common reductions in sizes

4-inch through 22-inch.

I. Galvanized areas damaged by welding to be coated with corrosion resistant aluminum paint.

J. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-

formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow

construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for

pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 22 gage.

3. 90 Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-

handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit

using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

4. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45 and

90 degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

5. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for

30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

6. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows

unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.

7. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 20 gage

thick with 2-piece welded construction.

8. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.

9. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch

wg: 26 gage.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.

2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts:

a. Aluminum, with seams and laps arranged on top of duct.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections. Secure fittings with screws. Install screws at intervals of 10 inches, with a

minimum of (3) screws per fitting. Seal all joints and seams.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.


ONTARIO, OR


K. Protect duct interiors with sheet metal or plastic sheet covers from moisture, construction debris

and dust, and other foreign materials until system is energized. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct

Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines," Intermediate Level.

L. Intermediate duct reinforcement to be same as duct material.

M. Do not exceed 45 degrees for easement transition angle.

N. Insulation: Where Drawings and Specifications require ducts to be insulated, make provisions

for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access

doors, and similar operating devices. Metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness

and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished used for this purpose shall be attached

to the duct. Linings in air ducts shall meet the Erosion Test Method described in UL

Publication no. 181.

O. Counterflashing: Counterflash ductwork penetrating roof.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,

and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which

hangers are being attached.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

G. Support round ducts from building structure with galvanized steel hangers as recommended in

SMACNA manual. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of inserts or other

acceptable anchors.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic

forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint

Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." or ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and

seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to

structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section

233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

3.8 DUCT CLEANING

A. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

3.9 AIR TEST AND BALANCE

A. Prepare the system for tests as specified in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC" and correct deficiencies found by the Test and Balance firm.

B. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings indicate inside clear dimensions. Make allowances for

duct requiring internal sound lining, or insulation to provide "inside clear"(IC) dimensions.

C. In addition to the requirements above, add supplemental bracing as necessary to prevent sagging

and drumming, and/or vibration.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

NONMETAL DUCTS 233116 - 1

SECTION 233116 - NONMETAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fabric ducts and fittings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing requirements for nonmetal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for single-wall, rectangular and round ducts.

3. Division 23 Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct-mounting access

doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Building Codes and Standards:

1. Product must be Classified by Underwriter's Laboratories in accordance with the 25/50

flame spread/smoke developed requirements of NFPA 90A and are also classified in

accordance with ICC Evaluation Service AC167 and UL 2518.

2. All product sections must be labeled with the logo and classification marking of Under-

writer's Laboratories.

1.4 DESIGN AND QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer must have documented design support information including duct sizing, vent and

orifice location, vent and orifice sizing, length, and suspension. Parameters for design,

including maximum air temperature, velocity, pressure and fabric permeability, shall be

considered and documented.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on materials and manufactured products

used for work of this Section.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Building Code Data: Submit UL file number under which product is Classified by Underwriter's

Laboratories for both NFPA 90A and ICC AC167.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Fittings.

2. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment.

3. Submit manufacturer's drawings indicating size and placement of dispersion units, and

mounting instructions.

4. Submit manufacturer's performance data for each fabric duct system, including airflow

rate, inlet velocity, static pressure and exit velocity out of duct system.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer must provide a 10 Year Product Warranty for products supplied for the fabric

portion of this system as well as a Design and Performance Warranty.


A. Protect fabric system and components from damage during shipping, storage and handling.

B. Where possible, store products inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store

outside, store above grade and enclose with a vented waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the following in manufactured in the

United States:

1. FabricAir, Inc.

312-A Swanson Drive

Lawrenceville, GA 30043

Phone: (502) 493-2210

FAX: (502) 493-4002

Email: [email protected]

2. DuctSox® Corporation

4343 Chavenelle Road

Dubuque, IA 52002

Phone: (866) DUCTSOX or (563) 589-2777

FAX: (866) 398-1646 or (563) 589-2754

Email: www.DuctSox.com


ONTARIO, OR


2.2 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM; FABRIC

A. Fabric: Air diffusers shall be constructed of a coated woven fire retardant and permeable fabric

complying with the following physical characteristics:

1. Fabric Construction: 100 percent Flame Retardant Polyester.

2. Weight: 8.8 oz./yd2 per ASTM D3776.

3. Shrinkage: Max 0.5 percent per DIN EN 26630.

4. Color: Coordinate with Architect.

5. Air Permeability: 0 cfm/ft2 per ASTM D737.

6. Temperature Range: -40 deg F to 284 deg F.

7. Fire Retardancy: Classified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with the flame

spread/smoke developed requirements of NFPA 90-A, ICC AC167 and UL 2518.

B. Fabrication Requirements:

1. Air dispersion accomplished by using conical aerodynamic nozzles. Diameter of nozzles

to be 3/4-inch height and be minimum 1/2-inch.

2. Size, quantity, and location of orifices to be specified and approved by manufacturer and

engineer.

3. Inlet connection to metal duct via fabric draw band with anchor patches as supplied by

manufacturer. Anchor patches to be secured to metal duct via. zip screw fastener -

supplied by Contractor.

4. Inlet connection includes zipper for easy removal / maintenance.

5. Lengths to include required zippers as specified by manufacturer.

6. System to include Adjustable Flow Devices to balance turbulence, airflow and

distribution as needed. Flow restriction device shall include ability to adjust the airflow

resistance from 0.06 - 0.60 in w.g. static pressure.

7. End cap includes zipper for easy maintenance.

8. Fabric system shall include connectors to accommodate suspension system listed below.

9. Any deviation from a straight run shall be made using a gored elbow or an efficiency tee.

Normal 90 degree elbows are 5 gores and the radius of the elbow is 1.5 times the

diameter of the fabric duct.

C. Design Parameters:

1. Fabric systems shall be designed from 0.25-inch water gage minimum to 3.1-inches

maximum, with 0.5-inch as the standard.

2. Fabric system shall be limited to design temperatures between -40 deg F and 284 deg F.

3. Design CFM, static pressure and diffuser length shall be designed or approved by the

manufacturer.

4. Do not use fabric diffusers in concealed locations.

5. Use fabric diffusers only for positive pressure air distribution components of the

mechanical ventilation system.

D. Suspension Hardware (one of following):

1. Tension Cable: System shall be installed using a tension cable system including a single

(one row) located 3 inches above top-dead-center (one row) or 3 inches above the 10 and

2 o'clock locations of the fabric duct system. Two row supports are required for systems

of 32-inch diameter and larger. Hardware to include cable, eye bolts, cable clamps and


ONTARIO, OR


turnbuckle(s) as required. System attachment shall be made using nylon snap clips spaced

24 inches. Component options include (must specify per area if multiple on same

project):

a. Galvanized steel cable.

b. Stainless steel cable.

c. Plastic coated stainless steel cable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM; FABRIC:

A. Install chosen suspension system in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer.

Instructions for installation shall be provided by the manufacturer with product.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Clean air handling unit and ductwork prior to the fabric duct system unit-by-unit as it is

installed. Clean external surfaces of foreign substance which may cause corrosive deterioration

of facing.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or distribution

devices at time of ductwork installation, cover with polyethylene film or other covering which

will keep the system clean until installation is completed.

C. If fabric duct systems become soiled during installation, they should be removed and cleaned

following the manufacturers standard terms of laundry.



ONTARIO, OR

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Flange connectors.

3. Turning vanes.

4. Duct-mounted access doors.

5. Grease duct access panel assemblies.

6. Flexible connectors.

7. Flexible ducts.

8. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and



A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

C. Comply with NFPA 5000, "Building Construction and Safety Code."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise


ONTARIO, OR


indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2

finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for

concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Cesco Products.

d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

e. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

f. McGill AirFlow LLC.

g. METALAIRE, Inc.

h. Nailor Industries Inc.

i. Penn Ventilation.

j. Ruskin Company.

k. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.


ONTARIO, OR


b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064-inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:



the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Cesco Products.

d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

e. McGill AirFlow LLC.

f. METALAIRE, Inc.

g. Penn Ventilation Company.

h. Nailor Industries Inc.

i. Ruskin Company.

j. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for

attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.

e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.

6. Blade Axles: Stainless Steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.


ONTARIO, OR


2.3 FLANGE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,

gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.4 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Aerodyne, Inc.


3. Duro Dyne Inc.

4. METALAIRE, Inc.

5. SEMCO Incorporated.


B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support

with bars perpendicular to blades set for ducts over 36 inches; set into vane runners suitable for

duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded

fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set for ducts

over 36 inches; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Single wall.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger

dimensions.

G. Install turning vanes in all square and rectangular elbows.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers:


ONTARIO, OR


1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.


4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

6. McGill AirFlow LLC.

7. Nailor Industries Inc.

8. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Door: Single wall with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class.

3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure

ducts.

4. Factory set at 10-inch wg.

5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.

6. Hinge: Continuous piano.

7. Latches: Cam.

8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.

9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.6 GREASE DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers:


ONTARIO, OR



2. Flame Gard, Inc.

3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0428-inch stainless steel.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F.

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:


2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2

strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 24 gage thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum

sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.




G. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-

resistant coating.





ONTARIO, OR


2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. Hart and Cooley, Inc.

3. JP Lampborn.

4. McGill AirFlow LLC.


B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film. Fabricated with

acoustically transparent nylon inner fabric mechanically locked without adhesives.

1. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 5500 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 250 deg F.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive.

2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust

fan unless otherwise indicated.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

4. Elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

H. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

I. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing and

HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

K. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.

L. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

M. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach

thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start

and stop of fans.

N. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and details for a weatherproof

system. Caulk perimeter with color matched non-shrink and non-hardening caulk. Coordinate

installation with General Contractor and architectural installation details.


A. Tests and Inspections:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Utility set fans.

2. Upblast roof exhaust fans.

3. In-line centrifugal fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of

product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,





intended use.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be

licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.


ONTARIO, OR


C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with

protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 07 Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTILITY SET FANS



1. Carnes Company HVAC.

2. Loren Cook Company.

3. Penn Ventilation.

4. Greenheck Fan Corp.

B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

C. Housing: Fabricated of galvanized steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or

welded to scroll sheets.

1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.

D. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel

inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.

E. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

F. Accessories:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Inlet and Outlet: Flanged.

2. Access Door: Gasketed door in scroll with latch-type handles.

3. Drain Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest point

of housing.

4. Vibration Isolators:

a. Type: Spring isolators.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUST FANS



1. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Company.



4. New York Blower Company (The).



B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle square, one-piece, aluminum

base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,

with rain and snow drains and grease collector, where applicable.

2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

F. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Provided by Electrical Contractor.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2 inches thick, rigid, fiberglass

insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof

opening and fan base.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Overall Height: 12 inches.

2. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

3. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

4. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.

5. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides.

2.3 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Company.



4. New York Blower Company (The).



C. Description: In-line, direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide

vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and

accessories.

D. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges,

and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

E. Direct-Driven Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located

on outside of fan housing.

F. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound

Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07

Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing

and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with

flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct

Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.



1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.


B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


ONTARIO, OR


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Refer to Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,

and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.



ONTARIO, OR

WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION SYSTEM 233425 - 1

SECTION 233425 - WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Welding collection system.

2. Welding exhaust collection duct system.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevation 2,150 ft. above

sea level.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Welding exhaust collector including weather protection, duct silencer, return air final

filter, remote start/stop switch, gauges and controllers.


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For welding exhaust collector to include in emergency,





intended use.


ONTARIO, OR


B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be

licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with

protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to


C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTING SYSTEM - See Drawings.



1. Camfil Air Pollution Control.

2. Lincoln Electric.

B. Description: Furnish a complete filter bank system that is designed to accommodate nearly any

welding/cutting application. It is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism and dust bin

below the filter to collect the particulate. The cleaning mechanism is designed to eliminate

filter clogging. The frame is constructed of heavy gauge steel tubes and channels and heavy

gauge steel sheeting. The entire structure is sealed weather tight with a polyester coating.

Neoprene gaskets are used to seal the filter air and weather tight.

C. Filter cartridges: MERV-16 cylinder type filter cartridges shall be arranged in a horizontal

orientation. They shall be serviced from outside the collector through a front access port.

D. The welding exhaust collector fan shall be single-width inlet capable of operating over the

entire range in accordance with the equipment schedule.

1. Fan housings are to be heavy gauge, continuously welded construction. Housings are to

be reinforced with rigid bracing to increase structural integrity and prevent vibration.

Housing inlet cones shall be aerodynamically designed and spun providing a minimum


ONTARIO, OR


separation of airflow. Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in accordance with the

standard dimensions adopted by AMCA for centrifugal fans.

E. Accessories:

1. Factory installed magnehelic gauge across main filter cartridge.

2. Dust Bin.

3. Compressed air pulse jet filter cleaning system.

4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing.

5. Access Door: Gasketed door in scroll with latch-type handles.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Manufacturer's Electrical Control System:

1. Include variable frequency drive and airflow controller to maintain the design airflow to

maintain constant velocity airflow as filter load. Pressure range 0-20-inch w.c.

2. Control system to include soft motor start.

3. Indoor installation NEMA Type 12 enclosure.

4. Window for VFD display.

5. Delta P on-demand cleaning.

6. Start/Stop push buttons.

7. Control panel disconnect.

8. Control power transformer.

9. Running light.

10. Approvals: UL/CUL.

2.3 WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION FAN MOTORS

A. All motors furnished shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest

applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and ASTM. Motors must meet or exceed CEE

Premium Efficiency™ full load efficiencies. The Consortium for Energy Efficiency (CEE).

B. Motors shall be premium efficiency severe duty type, NEMA Design B.

2.4 WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION SPARK ARRESTOR SYSTEM

A. Furnish and install spark arrestor system to serve the grinding room exhaust.

B. The following equipment shall be provided with the welding exhaust collection spark arrestor:

1. Dust Bin: Ducted directly from spark arrestor.

2.5 WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION DUCTWORK

A. Submittals / Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Description: Furnish a complete welding exhaust duct system interconnecting Owner furnished

welding equipment to the Welding Exhaust Collection System including duct work, hangers and

accessories. All ductwork associated with the welding exhaust collection system should be

round. Rectangular duct is not permitted.

C. Galvanized: ASTM A527 with a G90 rating.

D. Temp rating is 500 Deg. F with no breakdown of zinc - Zinc melting point is 740 deg. F.

E. All ducting and its components shall have been tested to 80 inch WG using the following

gauged reference:

1. All sizes use 18 gauge material thickness.

F. Fittings and Accessories:

1. All standard branch fittings shall be produced on a 30-60 degree angle.

2. Provide flexible extraction arm according to M001, M002 schedules.

G. Non Clamp Together Round Duct and Fittings shall comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible", based on indicated static pressure class unless


1. General material requirements shall comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards – Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thickness, and duct

construction methods.


A. All hangers and supports for serving the welding exhaust collection ductwork shall be sized

to support the weight of the ductwork plus the weight of water to fill the duct half full with

water. Refer to the mechanical drawings for schedule of water weight per linear foot of duct.

B. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible."

D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.


ONTARIO, OR



A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound

Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,

and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of

Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WELDING EXHAUST COLLECTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install welding exhaust collector level and plumb.

B. Assemble collection unit per manufacturer's installation guidelines and install in accordance

with manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions.

C. Contractor shall protect the collector inlet and outlet during construction to prevent construction

debris from entering the collector prior to making duct connection to the unit. Do not operate

fan system until filters are in place.

D. Factory trained technicians shall inspect and commission all components including: collection

system, spark arrestor system, and electrical connections.

E. Support units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-

and seismic-control devices are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls

for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in

concrete base.

F. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to

equipment, the seismic force required by code.

G. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

H. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing

and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 WELDING EXHAUST DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Exhaust Air Ducts Connected to Welding Exhaust Collector:

a. 30-60 degree takeoffs shall be used in the welding exhaust collector ductwork.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Pressure Class: Negative 15-inch wg.

1. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

C. Return Air (Clean Air) Ducts Connected to Welding Exhaust Collector:

1. Round and oval ductwork downstream of abort gate shall be spiral seam

construction. Flanged duct connections with gasket seals shall be used for all return air

ductwork.

2. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.

3. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.

B. Install ducts adjacent to welding exhaust collector to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install welding exhaust collection ducts and fittings per manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Connect wiring and ground equipment and ductwork according to Division 26 Electrical

Specifications.



1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

8. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.


B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.



ONTARIO, OR

LISTED KITCHEN VENTILATION SYSTEM EXHAUST DUCTS 233533 - 1

SECTION 233533 - LISTED KITCHEN VENTILATION SYSTEM EXHAUST DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Listed grease ducts.

2. Access doors.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for listed grease ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: For listed grease ducts.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

3. Detail fabrication and assembly of hangers and seismic restraints.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints

and seams in listed grease ducts and field-fabricated grease ducts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LISTED GREASE DUCTS



ONTARIO, OR


1. CaptiveAire

2. Heat-Fab, Inc.

3. Metal-Fab, Inc.

4. Protech Systems, Inc.

5. Schebler, Inc.

6. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.

7. Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co.

8. Van-Packer Company, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -listed, and -labeled, double-wall ducts tested according to

UL 1978 and rated for 500 deg F continuously, or 2000 deg F for 30 minutes; with positive or

negative duct pressure and complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 2-inch annular space filled with

high-temperature, ceramic-fiber insulation.

1. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, 18 gauge Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.

2. Outer Jacket: 16 gauge Aluminized steel or 18 gauge Stainless steel where concealed. 18

gauge or thicker Stainless steel where exposed.

D. Gaskets and Flanges: Ensure that gaskets and sealing materials are rated at 1500 deg F

minimum.

E. Hood Connectors: Constructed from same material as grease duct with internal or external

continuously welded or brazed joints.

F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars,

support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials

and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. Include unique

components required to comply with NFPA 96 including cleanouts, transitions, adapters, and

drain fittings.

G. Grease Duct Supports: Construct duct bracing and supports from non-combustible material.

1. Design bracing and supports to carry static and seismic loads within stress limitations of

the International Building Code.

2. Ensure that bolts, screws, rivets and other mechanical fasteners do not penetrate duct

walls.

H. Comply with ASTM E 2336.

I. Factory Tests: Test and inspect fire resistance of grease duct system according to

ASTM E 2336 in presence of Owner.

1. Allow consultant two days' minimum notification before test is performed.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS



ONTARIO, OR


1. 3M.

2. Acudor Products, Inc.

3. CaptiveAire.


5. Sachwin Products, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -listed, and -labeled, double-wall maintenance access doors

tested according to UL 1978 and rated for 500 deg F continuously, or 2000 deg F for 30

minutes; with positive or negative duct pressure and complying with NFPA 211.

1. Construction: 0.0625-inch ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel inner shell

and aluminized-steel or stainless-steel outer cover with two handles.

2. Fasteners: Stainless-steel bolts and wing nuts.

a. Ensure that bolts do not penetrate interior of duct space.

3. Maintenance Access Door Dimensions: 12 inches by 12 inches.

a. Where duct dimensions preclude the use of a 12-inch by 12-inch door, the opening

shall be not less than 12 inches on one side and shall be large enough to provide

access for cleaning and maintenance.

b. Ensure at least 1-inch clearance is provided between door and edge of ductwork on

all sides.

4. Door Label: Mark door with uppercase lettering as follows: "ACCESS PANEL. DO NOT

OBSTRUCT."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Comply with

requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

B. Coordinate connections to kitchen exhaust hoods with requirements in Section 233813

"Commercial-Kitchen Hoods."

C. Coordinate connections to exhaust fans with requirements in Section 233423 "HVAC Power

Ventilators."


ONTARIO, OR


D. Comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights

according to product listing or NFPA 211 and UL 2221, whichever is most stringent.

E. Install airtight maintenance access doors where indicated.

F. Seal between sections of grease exhaust ducts according to manufacturer's written installation

instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.

G. Connections: Make grease duct connections according to the International Mechanical Code.

1. Grease duct to exhaust fan connections: Connect grease ducts to inlet side of fan using

flanges, gaskets, and bolts.

2. Grease duct to hood connections:

a. Make grease duct to hood joints connections using internal or external

continuously welded or brazed joints.

H. Support ducts at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of ducts and

accessories, without applying loading on kitchen hoods.

1. Securely attach supports and bracing to structure.

I. Grease Duct Enclosures: Comply with requirements of the International Building Code and

ASTM E 2336.

J. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by listed kitchen ventilation system exhaust ducts

installation.

K. Slope: Grease duct shall slope not less than 1/4-inch per foot toward the hood or toward a

grease reservoir.

1. Except: Where horizontal ducts exceed 75 feet in length, the slope shall be not less than 1

inch per foot.

L. Grease Reservoirs

1. Install grease reservoirs in the bottom of horizontal ductwork and the bottommost section

of duct risers. Install in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

2. Reservoir dimensions shall be as follows:

a. Duct larger than 12 inches in all dimensions: Reservoir not less than 12 inches by

12 inches.

b. Duct less than 12 inches in a dimension: Reservoir not more than 2 inches smaller

than the duct in that dimension.

3. Reservoir depth: 1 inch or greater.

4. Drainage: Sloped to point for drainage.

M. Access Doors / Cleanouts:

1. Provide grease duct access doors at grease reservoirs.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Access doors shall not be more than 20 feet apart, and not more than 10 feet from any

change in direction greater than 45 degrees.

3. Doors shall be located on the vertical faces of the duct whenever possible. Where it is

not possible to locate doors on the vertical faces, doors shall be located on the top of the

ductwork, with provisions to ensure accessibility.


A. Perform air leakage test in presence of Owner before concealment of any portion of the grease

duct system.

1. Notify Owner a minimum of two days before test is performed.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes diffusers, registers, and grilles for all HVAC systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling

and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes

and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be

located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate

construction, finish, color and mounting details. Include materials and methods of

assembly.

2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for

each type of air outlet and inlet.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers,

and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other

manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to

Division 01 Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


ONTARIO, OR.


2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Krueger.

2. Price Industries.

3. Titus.


A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the

Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make

final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling

panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items

conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,

before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING


ONTARIO, OR.


A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed

surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have

damaged finishes.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR

COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - 1

SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Type I and Type II commercial kitchen hoods.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Listed Hood: A hood tested according to UL 710 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities


B. Standard Hood: A hood that complies with design, construction, and performance criteria of

applicable national and local codes.

C. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.

D. Type II Hood: A hood designed for heat and steam removal and other nongrease applications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Hoods.

2. Grease removal devices.

3. Fire-suppression systems.

4. Lighting fixtures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service requirements,

duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work.

2. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required

overhang.

3. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow and pressure loss, at actual Project-

site elevation.

4. Indicate method of attaching hangers to building structure.

5. Show exhaust and makeup air ducts, and fittings connecting to hoods.

6. Show water-supply and drain piping.

7. Show control cabinets.


ONTARIO, OR


8. Show fire-protection piping, actuation devices, and manual control devices.

9. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.


C. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in requirements for drain

connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to illustrate fire-suppression nozzle

locations.




intended use.

B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."

C. SMACNA Compliance:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1,

"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."

2. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards:

Metal and Flexible," second edition.

D. Comply with NFPA 5000, 16.3.2.2.1, 55.10; NFPA 96 and NFPA 17A.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other Work, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression, and fire alarm system components. (NFPA 17A, 5.2.1.9)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Commercial Kitchen Hoods:

a. Captive-Aire Systems.

b. Duo-Aire, Inc.

c. Gaylord Industries, Inc.

d. Greenheck.

e. Halton Company.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Wet-Chemical Fire-Suppression Systems:

a. Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.

b. Badger Fire Protection, Inc.

c. Fenwall Safety Systems, Inc.; Div. of Kidde Technologies, Inc.

d. Pyro Chem, Inc.

2.2 HOOD MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.03-inch.

2. General: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for

applying and designating finishes.

3. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish

surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of

cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

4. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, cold-

rolled, unpolished finish).

5. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 6 finish (satin, directional polish).

6. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 7 finish (satin, reflective, directional

polish).

7. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with

oiled, exposed matte finish.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating

designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.03-inch.

D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123/A 123M

requirements.

E. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF

certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall

comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact

with food.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.

F. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for

permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.

G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC

that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and

cleaning compounds, and passes testing according to UL 710.


ONTARIO, OR


2.3 HOOD FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that

minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile

welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.

1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,

continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,

filling in with solder, or spot welding.

2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining

surfaces.

3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld

smooth and flush.

4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent

corrosion.

5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint

20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A

780M.

B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."

C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or

fastening devices.

D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks

mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and

finishing.

E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.

F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.

G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers

and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.

H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and

utility lines and mechanical connections.

I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating

components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless


J. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication

Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment."

K. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:

1. Fabricate panels on three sides with same material as hood, and extend from ceiling to

top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.

2. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches.


ONTARIO, OR


3. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment

Fabrication Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625-inch thick, stainless-steel shelf tops.

2.4 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION

A. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds and make grease removal devices and

makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.

1. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to


2. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links.

3. Exhaust-Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0625-inch thick stainless steel at least 3 inches long,

continuously welded to top of hood and at corners. Fabricate a collar with a 0.5-inch

wide duct flange.

B. Hood Configuration: Exhaust and makeup air.

1. Makeup air shall be introduced through laminar-flow-type perforated metal panels on

front of hood canopy.

C. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy

D. Grease Removal Devices: Removable, stainless-steel, filter/baffle grease filters with spring-

loaded fastening. Fabricate with minimum 0.0781-inch thick stainless steel for filter frame and

removable collection cup and trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection

cup. Filters/baffles shall comply with UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts."

E. Removable Grease Extractor: Removable, stainless-steel extractor, at least 0.0781-inch thick.

Hood with extractor must be tested according to UL 710.

F. Light Fixtures: UL-listed, recessed fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vaportight. Wiring

shall be installed in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of fixtures

shall provide a minimum of 70 fc on cooking surface below hood.

1. Switches shall be mounted on front panel of hood canopy.

G. Wet-Chemical Fire-Suppression System: Pre-engineered distribution piping designed for

automatic detection and release or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator.

Fire-suppression system shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities


1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40,

plain ends.

2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

3. Pipe Covers: Chrome-plated aluminum tubing.

4. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and

controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet

mounted on hood. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting adjacent to hood.

Exposed piping shall be covered with stainless-steel sleeves. Exposed fittings shall be

chrome plated.


ONTARIO, OR


5. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.

6. Furnish an electric-operated, gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed

indicator for field installation.

7. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and

fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent.

8. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare

terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to

indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet

with relays or starters.

H. Hood Controls: Single, hood-mounting control cabinet shall control groups of adjacent hoods

and shall be fabricated of stainless steel.

1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust fan

with fire-suppression system to operate fan during fire-suppression-agent release and to

remain in operation until manually stopped.

2. High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall shut down

before hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-suppression

system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before

equipment installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install hoods level and plumb.

B. Complete field assembly of hoods where required.

1. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.

2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent

finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication" Article.

C. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and

servicing hoods, grease removal devices, and fire-suppression systems according to

manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel

fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install hoods to operate free from vibration.

G. Install seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines,"

Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints for Kitchen Equipment."

H. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-

steel fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum.

I. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing,

unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.

J. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to machine with clearance to allow service and maintenance.

B. Duct Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct

Accessories" for flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct

connections.

C. Fire-Suppression Piping: Install piping connections for remote-mounted suppression systems

according to NFPA 17, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."

D. Ground equipment.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL

486A and UL 486B.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-

control testing:

B. Testing: See Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing."

C. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control

testing.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical

connections. Report results in writing.

1. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is

defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with

excessive noise or vibration.


ONTARIO, OR



equipment.

3. Test motors and rotating equipment for proper rotation and lubricate moving parts

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Test liquid-carrying and water, drain, and gas components for leaks. Repair or replace

leaking components.

E. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.

B. Set field-adjustable switches.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize hoods and associated services, both inside

and out, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match

original finish.



ONTARIO, OR

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 - 1

SECTION 235100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Listed single or double-wall vents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturers literature with material gages, product listing and furnished

accessories.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding

Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks.

C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 Articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:



the following:

a. American Metal Products; MASCO Corporation.

b. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem Inc.

c. FAMCO.

d. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

e. Heat-Fab, Inc.

f. Industrial Chimney Company.

g. LSP Products Group, Inc.

h. Metal-Fab, Inc.


ONTARIO, OR


i. Schebler Co. (The).

j. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.

k. Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co.

l. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.

m. Van-Packer Company, Inc.

2.2 LISTED TYPE B VENTS


1. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

2. Heat-Fab, Inc.

3. Metal-Fab, Inc.


5. Schebler, Inc.




B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 441 and rated for 480 deg F

continuously for Type B, or 550 deg F continuously for Type BW; with neutral or negative flue

pressure complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least 1/4-inch airspace.

D. Inner Shell: Aluminum alloy or stainless steel.

E. Outer Jacket: Galvanized or aluminized steel.

F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof

flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated

from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.

1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude minimum 98 percent of rainfall.

2. Termination: Antibackdraft.

2.3 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS


1. Metal-Fab, Inc.


3. Schebler, Inc.


continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211 and suitable for

condensing-gas appliances.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least 1/2-inch airspace.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel.

E. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel.

F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof



1. Termination: Manufacturers standard wall or any roof termination as indicated.

2.4 LISTED BUILDING-HEATING-APPLIANCE CHIMNEYS


1. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

2. Heat-Fab, Inc.

3. Metal-Fab, Inc.


5. Schebler, Inc.





continuously, or 1700 deg F for 10 minutes; with neutral or negative flue pressure complying

with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1 inch annular space filled

with high-temperature, ceramic-fiber insulation.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel.

E. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 103 and UL 959 and rated for

1400 deg F continuously, or 1800 deg F for 10 minutes; with positive or negative flue pressure

complying with NFPA 211.

F. Outer Jacket: Galvanized or aluminized steel.

G. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof



1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall.

2.5 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS

A. Cable: Three galvanized, stranded wires of a size determined by the manufacturer.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS

A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination

heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

B. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all

accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

C. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest

point piped to nearest drain.

D. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by

manufacturer.

E. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior

finish.

F. Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch out of plumb from top to

bottom.

3.2 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed

finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean

external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup

finish to match factory or shop finish.

C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed

or connected to equipment.



ONTARIO, OR

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200 - 1

SECTION 237200 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged energy recovery units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished

specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.



connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include in




by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ARI Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with

ARI 1060, "Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply

with ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."

D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to

recommendations of NRCA.


ONTARIO, OR


E. UL Compliance: Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in

UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspension

system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light

fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS


following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2. Lennox.


4. RenewAire, Inc.

B. Housing: Manufacturer's standard bolted construction with corrosion-protection coating and

exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal

parts, minimum 1-inch- thick thermal three pound density foil faced insulation, knockouts for

electrical and piping connections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs. The unit shall be of

utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. Housing shall be minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel.

Duct collars shall be provided as standard manufactured and tested to meet NFPA 90A and UL

181 requirements.

C. Heat Recovery Device: Static plate, heat and humidity transfer.

D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with flexible duct connections.

1. Motor and Drive: Electrically Commutated Direct driven.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section 230513 "Common

Motor Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

5. Blower and motor assemblies shall slide out for easy inspection.

E. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access

plenum.

4. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.

5. Thickness: 2 inches.

6. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 8.

7. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting

wire grid.

8. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for

bolting together into built-up filter banks.

F. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits.

Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.

1. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure contains relays, starters, and terminal

strip.

2. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, and

terminal strip.

3. Include nonfused disconnect switches.

4. Speed controller to vary fan capacity.

G. Accessories:

1. Intake and exhaust air streams shall be have 2-inch- thick filters.

2. Low-Leakage, Isolation Dampers: galvanized-steel dampers with compressible jamb

seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, and electric damper operator factory wired.

3. Duct flanges.

4. Hinged access doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recovery

equipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture

damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before

installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


ONTARIO, OR


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixed-plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions.

1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and

downstream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in

Division 23 Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and

balancing.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Division 23 Section 233113 "Metal

Ducts."



test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:


proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Adjust seals and purge.


equipment.

4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.

5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



ONTARIO, OR

PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT 237400 - 1

SECTION 237400 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated

capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer:

1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate

coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.


C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged outdoor HVAC equipment to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged

outdoor HVAC equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01

Section 012500, "Substitution Procedures" for requirements for proposed substitutions.



intended use.

C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for

Mechanical Refrigeration."

D. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

E. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace Section.

F. Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236, Safety

Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.


ONTARIO, OR


G. AHRI Certification: Units shall be AHRI certified and listed.

H. Safety: Certification by ETL and ETL US listed.

I. AHRI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btuh and More: Rate packaged outdoor

HVAC equipment capacity according to AHRI 340/360, "Commercial and Industrial Unitary

Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment."

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AHRI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor

Unitary Equipment." Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit

ratings sheet.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of manufacturer provided roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

penetrations.

B. Coordinate size, location, and installation of rooftop air-conditioner manufacturer's roof curbs

and equipment supports with roof installer.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components

of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights

Owner may have under Contract Documents.

1. Limited 10 years Aluminized Heat Exchanger.

2. Limited 5 years on compressors.

3. Limited 1 year all other covered components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS






2.2 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT


1. Lennox Industries Inc.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Carrier Corporation.

3. Trane.

4. York.

5. Daikin.

B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of

compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration

and temperature controls, filters, dampers, exhaust fans, and heat exchangers. Include run test

report of completed unit to include leak testing and pressure testing.

1. Unit components shall be labeled, including electrical and controls.

2. Wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be affixed to the interior of

the control compartments hinged access door.

3. Unit nameplate shall be affixed to the exterior of the unit.

C. Cabinet:

1. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall

insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components,

with joints between sections sealed.

2. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof

panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting

lugs.

3. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

b. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

4. Air Leakage: Cabinet shall not exceed 1 percent of total airflow when tested at 3 times

the minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Sealing shall

be included between panels and between access doors and openings.

5. Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, heaters, exhaust fans, compressors, and

electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access doors with zinc cast

lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of 304 stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches

deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2010.

1. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.

E. Indoor Fan: Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Statically and dynamically balanced, double inlet

type with permanently lubricated, variable speed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet.

F. Exhaust Fans for RTU units:

1. Exhaust dampers shall be sized for 100 percent relief or exhaust.

2. Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced.

3. Access to exhaust fans shall be through double wall, hinged access doors with lockable

handles.

G. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.


ONTARIO, OR


H. Refrigerant Coils: Designed for use with R-410A refrigerant, aluminum-plate fin and seamless

copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.

1. Furnished with factory installed thermostatic expansion valves.

I. Compressor(s): Hermetic scroll compressor(s) with integral vibration isolators, internal

overcurrent and over temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

J. Refrigeration System:

1. Scroll Type Compressor(s).

2. Outside coil and fan.

3. Indoor coil and fan.

4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.

5. Check valves.

6. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements.

7. High capacity filter/driers.

8. Manual reset High-pressure switches.

9. Automatic reset Low-pressure switches.

10. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or

loss of air.

11. Independent refrigerant circuits.

12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.

13. Charge of refrigerant, Refrigerant R-410A.

K. Filters: RTU-units shall include 2-inch MERV 8 filters.

L. Heat Exchanger for RTU Units: Aluminized steel construction for natural gas-fired burners

with high altitude kit and the following controls:

1. Redundant type gas heat valve with manual shutoff.

2. Direct spark pilot ignition.

3. Fan and limit control.

4. Safety switches.

M. Dampers for RTU Units: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 100 percent outside air, with fully

modulating, spring-return damper motor and hood.

1. Outdoor Air Damper Maximum Leakage Rate: 4 CFM/sq. ft. at 1-inch w.g.

2. Return Air Damper Maximum Leakage Rate: 4 CFM/sq. ft. at 1-inch w.g.

3. Damper Reliability: 60,000 cycles minimum.

N. Economizer for RTU Units: Return- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter, and hood.

1. Control: Electronic-control system uses outside-air dry bulb to adjust mixing dampers.

2. Relief Damper: Powered exhaust fan, forward curved, barometric relief - SEE

SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS.

O. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted

disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in

circuit breaker.


ONTARIO, OR


P. Unit Controls: Units shall include terminal block for BMS integration, but a fully functional

package shall be provided.

Q. Unit greater than 2000 CFM shall be provided with a safety shutdown terminal block for field

installation of a smoke detector which shuts off the units' control circuit.

R. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, fully gasketed, and factory-installed wood

nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-

Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for

Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure packaged outdoor HVAC equipment

on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.

C. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing

with wall construction. Secure units to structural support per structural details on drawings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Sections regarding fuel

gas piping. Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with

union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate

the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking

under entire roof curb.

2. Connect supply ducts to rooftop unit with flexible duct connectors specified in Division

23 Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Terminate return-air duct through roof curb and insulate space between roof and bottom

of unit with 2-inch thick, acoustic duct liner.

D. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections

for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems."

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL

486A and UL 486B.




and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing packaged outdoor HVAC equipment and after electrical circuitry has

been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.




equipment.

C. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do

the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.

2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.

3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans.

4. Inspect internal insulation.

5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

8. Verify that filters are installed.

9. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris.

10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.

11. Connect and purge gas line.

12. Adjust vibration isolators.

13. Inspect operation of dampers.

14. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding.

15. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.


ONTARIO, OR


a. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

16. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

17. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.

18. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust

burner for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.

b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.

c. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.

d. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and

oxygen concentration.

e. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing

rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

19. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

20. Inspect outside-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

21. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

c. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.

d. Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

22. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and

normal and emergency shutdown.

23. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on

fan curve.

a. Supply-air volume.

b. Return-air volume.

c. Relief-air volume.

d. Outside-air intake volume.

24. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

b. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside-air

intake.

25. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes.

Inspect the following:

a. High-limit heat exchanger.

b. Warm-up for morning cycle.

c. Freezestat operation.

d. Economizer to limited outside-air changeover.

e. Alarms.


ONTARIO, OR


26. After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling

and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power

vents.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost.



ONTARIO, OR

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS AND HEAT PUMPS 238126 - 1

SECTION 238126 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS AND HEAT PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units may be connected to ducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


product indicated.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.




intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements

of the Contract Documents.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.

2. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.

3. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group.

4. LG

5. Daikin AC, Inc.

2.2 WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends and discharge drain pans

with drain connection.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with electronic linear expansion valve metering device. The expansion valve

shall be controlled by a microprocessor controlled step motor.

C. Fan: Direct drive fan. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor

with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of four speeds.

D. Fan Motors:

1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and

permanent lubrication.

E. Filters: Removable and washable.

F. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor fan section.

2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel with removable panels for access to controls, weep

holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and

gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: The compressor shall be a DC twin rotor rotary compressor with variable speed

inverter drive. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed.

Provide a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to

compressor motor windings to maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. No

crankcase heater is needed.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI

210/240, and with liquid subcooler. The outdoor condensing unit shall have an accumulator and

high pressure safety switch.

D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

F. Refrigerant: R-410A. The outdoor unit shall be pre-charged with R-410A refrigerant in

refrigerant tubing.

G. The outdoor condensing unit shall be compatible with different types of indoor fan coil units,

ceiling suspended, ducted, wall mounted or four way recessed ceiling cassette.

H. The outdoor condensing unit shall be equipped with an electronic control board that interfaces

with indoor fan coil unit to perform all necessary operation functions.

I. Heat Pump Unit: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat. Operation to -20

on heat pump unit. Unit shall be matched to indoor unit with capacities as shown on the

drawings with R410A refrigerant. Provide service valves, scroll compressor, internal pressure

relief valve, internal thermal overload, high pressure switch, loss of charge switch, filter drier

and balanced refrigeration system. Unit shall 13.0 minimum SEER and 70 dBA sound level.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. The control system shall contain a microprocessor for indoor units and one microprocessor for

outdoor units. The indoor microprocessor shall be the capabilities to monitoring return air

temperature, indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from wired controller

and controlling the outdoor unit. Provide a 24VDC for control signal between the indoor and

outdoor unit.

B. Thermostat: Wired remote controller functioning to remotely control compressor and

evaporator fan, with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.

3. LCD display indicating built in temperature sensor, set-point temperature, time setting,

operating mode, timer and fan speed.

4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

5. 12/24 volts control voltage from wired controller to indoor unit.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed, ARC type copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned,

dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends;

individually insulated in flexible, closed cell elastomeric material with thermal conductivity

equal to 0.27 BTU-inch/hour per sqft per deg F. and flame spread index of less than 25 tested by

ASTM E84.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch thick, reinforced

concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork

are specified in Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor

installation with concrete base.

D. Install seismic restraints.

E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be

disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and

specialty arrangements.

D. Ground equipment.


A. Inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections. Demonstrate that unit operates in all modes of operation. Report results in writing

including measures return, supply and outdoor temperatures.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division

01 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



ONTARIO, OR

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AND SPLIT-SYSTEM

AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 238128 - 1

SECTION 238128 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AND SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-

CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes factory engineered variable refrigerant volume (VRF) system consisting of

indoor air conditioning units (heating and cooling), outdoor air-source heat pumps/air

condensing units, refrigerant flow control devices (branch selector, branch controllers or heat

recovery units) and all related controls and accessories noted herein and on Contract Drawings.

B. The system shall be a heat recovery type system allowing simultaneous heating and cooling

operation and split system heat pumps including multiple evaporator, direct expansion air

cooled units with variable speed compressors, indoor fan coil units and controllers. The specific

method of proving simultaneous heating and cooling varies with different manufacturers. At a

minimum, the number of independent zones showing on the Contract Documents based on the

basis of design manufacturer shall not be decreased.

C. Proposed systems shall take into account project site altitude and ambient operating

temperatures when designing their systems.

D. Refer to Division 23, Specification Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping" for field supplied

refrigerant piping, refrigerant and refrigerant specialties.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide engineered system flow diagrams similar to basis of design system shown on

contract documents. The Drawing to show pipe sizing, lengths, fittings, necessary

refrigerant charge and control wiring for the complete system.

2. These shop Drawings to include heating-cooling capacities of indoor and outdoor

systems, system diversity, electrical requirements, sound data and related.



connection. Piping size in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Provide

certificate of approval from manufacturer


ONTARIO, OR




A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring to be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

C. The system shall be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 registered facility. The system

shall be factory tested for safety and function.

D. The outdoor units shall be fully charged HFC type refrigerant. Systems using HCFC

refrigerants are not allowed. Additional charge (field installed) may be required for a fully

charged system.

E. Installer's Qualifications: The system shall be installed by a factory trained and certified or

licensed contractor. Training and certification shall be by the VRF manufacturer or authorized

manufacturers' agent. Untrained contractors who wish to bid this Project may contact the local

authorized manufacturers' service agent to arrange training prior to bid day.

F. Designer's qualifications: Proposed systems shall be designed or reviewed by manufacturer or

manufacturers authorized service agent.

G. Startup service shall be by factory authorized agent. This startup agent shall assist independent

third party Commissioning Authority (CxA) on final commissioning of system. Startup

personnel shall perform all troubleshooting, adjusting and repair of system as required for a

completely functional system.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturers' standard warranty but no less than 12-months from substantial completion.

Installing contractor must adhere to manufactures' design, installation and startup requirements

to achieve warranty.

B. Compressors shall have manufacturers' limited 5-year warranty on compressors. Compressor

warranty shall be limited to manufacturing defects only.


A. The units shall be stored and handled in strict accordance with manufacturers'

recommendations. All equipment shall be protected from extreme temperatures and protected

from construction and site debris.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




ONTARIO, OR






2.2 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEMS

A. Available Manufactures:

1. Daikin.

2. Mitsubishi Electric.

3. LG.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS

A. System description: Outdoor units shall be integral part of a complete engineered variable

refrigerant volume system with all main components provided by a single manufacturer.

Complete system shall be air-source heat pump/air cooled condensing unit allowing

simultaneous heating-cooling, heat recovery and multiple zones of indoor units.

B. The outdoor units shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and

refrigeration controls. The outdoor unit shall be single unit or a series of outdoor units, factory

combined to meet capacity requirements of project site. System shall include all safety devices,

refrigerant accessories, reversing valves, solenoid valves and related.

C. The outdoor unit cabinet shall be completely weather proof and corrosion resistant. The unit

enclosure shall be constructed of steel and coated with baked enamel or similar corrosion

protection paint.

D. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at site conditions including ambient winter and

summer temperatures listed and project altitude. System shall be capable of operating over the

following ranges at a minimum:

1. Heating Only: -13 deg F to 75 deg F with no de-rate of capacity listed in schedule.

2. Cooling Only: 22 deg F to 110 deg F.

3. Simultaneous Heating and Cooling: -4 deg F to 77 deg F.

4. System diversity shall not exceed values listed on Drawings.

E. Refrigeration Plant: Plant shall include compressors, condensers, reversing valves and related

assemblies for completely operational, factory furnished system. Plant shall have digitally

controlled oil separator and 'intelligent' oil management system. Plant factory furnished

components included but are not limited to; solenoid valves, crankcase heater, thermal and over

current protection, DC bus protection, high refrigerant pressure switch, defrost heating of

condenser coil and anti-short cycle protection of compressors. System shall also include control

circuit fuses and inverter overload protection.

1. Compressors: Variable speed scroll compressor with a minimum of turndown of 20

percent of single compressors rated capacity. Each compressor shall be equipped with

high pressure switch, thermal overload protection and crank case heater. Compressor(s)

shall be mounted on manufacturer's recommended vibration isolators. Multi-compressor


ONTARIO, OR



units may use variable speed first stage and constant speed second stage scroll

compressors.

2. Outdoor Fan: Variable speed propeller type fan setup from factory to deliver air against

free discharge (0-inch W.C.) resistance but selectable up to 0.15-inch W.C. in field. Fan

shall be permanently lubricated and include thermal over load protection. Fan shall be

configured for vertical discharge and include a steel fan guard. Fan shall be mounted on

manufacturers' recommended vibration isolators. Fan size and quantity based on

manufacturer selection to meet scheduled operating capacities shown on Drawings.

3. Outdoor Coil: Copper tube with mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Coil circuitry and

fin design to be based on manufacturers' standard design. Outdoor coil shall be protected

by metal guard. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion protection coating.

F. Electrical System: Control voltage and phase shall be as shown on Contract Drawings.

Outdoor unit shall be capable of operating within + or - 10 percent of listed nameplate voltage

without damage to unit. The electrical system shall include transformers for internal control

devices.

G. Control Wiring: Control wiring between indoor and outdoor units shall be via daisy chain

configuration of 2-conductor wire similar to RS485 communication wire. Coordinate with

installing Contractor whether wire is shielded or non-shielded.

2.4 REFRIGERANT CONTROL/DISTRIBUTION DEVICES.

A. Branch selectors (BS), branch circuit (BC) or heat recovery unit (HRU) shall be integral part of

complete VRF system and furnished by manufacturer. Devices shall be factory assembled,

piped and wired and tested for proper operation at factory. Cabinet construction shall be

galvanized steel and these units are designed to be installed indoors. Depending on

manufacturer, the following devices shall be included with refrigerant control devices:

1. Designed for simultaneous heating and cooling and include controller for optimal control

of refrigerant distribution.

2. Shall include a tube-in-tube or similar heat exchanger for refrigerant heat recovery.

3. Electronic expansion valves for refrigerant control.

4. Sound absorption thermal insulation made of flame and heat resistant polyethylene or

similar insulation. Insulation shall maintain sound pressure levels below 45 db on unit.

5. Integral drain pan and condensate drain connection for field installation of condensate

drain.

6. Unit shall have electrical and control interface for connection to complete VRF system.

2.5 INDOOR UNITS

A. Cassette Type Units: Four way throw cassette type indoor unit designed to sit flush in ceiling.

Indoor units shall be factory piped and wired and run tested at factory. Physical size of unit

shall be as noted on Drawings. Unit shall include controller that integrates with outdoor units,

refrigerant control devices and VRF control system. Controller shall include self-diagnostic

function, auto restart and run-test switch. The indoor unit is by same manufacturer as complete

VRF system and is purpose built for heating, cooling and heat recovery VRF operation.


ONTARIO, OR



1. Cabinet shall be designed to recess into ceiling and be constructed of steel in

manufacturers' standard paint scheme. Four-way throw grilles shall allow manually

adjustment of air flow pattern or be automatically controlled via integral control system.

Cabinet shall allow field connection of outdoor air duct. Return grille shall be located in

center of supply air grilles.

2. Refrigerant control shall by controlled by electronic thermal expansion valve controlled

by integral control system. Furnish system with overflow condensate switch that

deactivates indoor unit cooling plant upon hi condensate levels.

3. Indoor fan shall be direct drive and be statically and dynamically balanced at factory.

Multi-speed motor shall be permanently lubricated. Fan is designed for free discharge

but must be capable of delivering specified airflow with the inclusion of high-

performance filter listed in this Specification.

4. Coil shall be copper tube with mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Coils shall be

factory tested at factory. Factory installed drain pan shall be located below the indoor

coil.

5. Provide condensate pump or condensate lift device allowing condensate to be delivered

to 'overhead' condensate main line. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

Minimum lift shall be 20 inches.

6. Unit shall have electrical and control interface for connection to compete VRF system.

7. Maximum sound power levels shall be as noted on Drawings.

B. Concealed, ducted type units: Low profile horizontally mounted fan coil unit specifically

designed for VRF system. Indoor units shall be factory piped and wired and run tested at

factory. Unit shall include controller that integrates with outdoor units, refrigerant control

devices and VRF control system. Controller shall include self-diagnostic function, auto restart

and run-test switch. The indoor unit is by same manufacturer as complete VRF system and is

purpose built for heating, cooling and heat recovery VRF operation.

1. Cabinet shall be purpose-built, low profile unit designed for horizontal discharge and

horizontal inlet of airflow. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel construction and can be

unfinished (unpainted). Cabinet shall be constructed with flame and heat resistant, sound

absorbing thermal insulation. Access panels for electrical and control devices shall be

provided and clearly marked.

2. Refrigerant control shall by controlled by electronic thermal expansion valve controlled

by integral control system.

3. Indoor fan shall be direct drive and be statically and dynamically balanced at factory.

Fan motor shall be high efficiency electrical commutated (ECM) type motor for enhanced

system performance. Fan system shall have multiple setting for fan CFM and external

static pressure combinations. Motor shall be permanently lubricated.

4. Coil shall be copper tube with mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Coils shall be

factory tested at factory. Factory installed drain pan shall be located below the indoor

coil.

5. Provide condensate pump or condensate lift device allowing condensate to be delivered

to 'overhead' condensate main line. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

Minimum lift shall be 24 inches.

6. Unit shall have electrical and control interface for connection to compete VRF system.

7. Maximum sound power pressure values shall be as noted on Drawings.


ONTARIO, OR



2.6 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Plant control system: Each specific VRF plant Condensing outdoor units and subsequent indoor

units and refrigerant control devices shall be capable of independent scheduling via central

controller. Each plant controller shall have battery backup and all software required to operate

the system shall reside at this level. If loss of central controller, BMS or workstation occurs, the

system shall be capable of operating on own based on latest input values. Control wiring from

plant controller to indoor unit/refrigeration control devices shall be via daisy chain 2-conductor

system or similar. The plant controller shall include LCD or similar display revealing operating

status, operating mode, alarms and related points. The complete control system shall integrate to

a web interface.

B. Zone Level Controls: Individual indoor units shall be equipped with wired (wireless devices

not allowed) low voltage temperature sensor or wall mounted controller with integral

temperature sensor. Sensor shall be integrated with complete VRF control system. Sensor shall

be wall mounted type and individually addressable through central system. Zone temperature

sensor/controller shall include following characteristics:

1. On/off control.

2. Temperature adjustment (set point).

3. Room temperature.

4. Mode selection (heating/cooling).

5. Fans speed adjustment.

6. LCD or similar display.

C. BMS Gateway: VRF system shall be provided with a BMS gateway for integration of controls

with BMS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install outdoor units on manufactured support structure as shown on Drawings. Provide

isolation valves on refrigerant suction, hot gas and liquid lines for individual servings of

outdoor condensing units. Provide approved flexible refrigerant pipe connection on unit. Install

unit level and plumb.

B. Adhere to manufacturers' installation instructions when combing several outdoor units into a

single system (twinning).

C. Furnish and install refrigerant piping in strict accordance with VRF manufacturers' installation

guidelines and shop Drawings. Refer to Division 23 Section 232300 "Refrigeration Piping" for

additional information regarding refrigeration piping. Install piping to allow service of

equipment.

D. Outdoor Condensing units shall be provided pre-charge with refrigerant. Contractor shall

provide additional refrigerant charge to completely charge VRF system including refrigerant

lines and indoor units. Adhere to VRF manufacturer for final refrigerant charge required on the

system. Use only refrigerants specified by VRF manufacturer.


ONTARIO, OR



E. Connect power and control wiring in strict accordance to manufacturers written instructions.

Refer to Division 26 for specific requirement on line and low voltage wiring and conduit

installation.

3.2 INDOOR UNITS

A. Install units as noted on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturers' written installation

instructions. Maintain service access including filter and control-electrical access. Install unit

level and plumb.

B. Cassette type units shall fit flush with ceiling. Refer to Drawings for ceiling types. Where

installed in acoustical tile (lay-in) ceilings, coordinate provision of additional T-bar grid

accessories as required and necessary.

C. Where outdoor air is brought directly to indoor unit, provide flexible duct (flex duct) in lengths

outlined in Division 23 Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Division 23 Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories" and as noted on Drawings.

D. On ducted units, provide flexible connection on inlet and outlet connections as noted on

Drawings.

E. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with VRF manufacturers written instructions. Route

piping to maintain service clearances of unit.

F. Install condensate drain piping as noted on Drawings. Provide cleanouts as noted.

G. Connect refrigerant piping to refrigerant control/distribution devices in accordance to

manufacturers written instructions. Provide isolation valves on upstream piping (Outdoor

condensing unit side of device).

H. Locate refrigerant control devices above accessible ceilings or provide access hatch for service.

I. Locate refrigerant control devices that are loud in non occupied areas or provide sound

dampening insulation to reduce noise.

J. Install condensate drain piping on refrigerant control device as required.

K. Connect power and control wiring in strict accordance to manufacturers written instructions.

Refer to Division 26 for specific requirement on line and low voltage wiring and conduit

installation.

3.3 CONTROLS

A. Install controls and wiring in accordance with VRF manufactures installation requirements.

Coordinate control installation with Temperature Controls Contractor and Div 26. Arrange for

required AC power required for individually controller with Division 26. Coordinate provision

of conduit required for controls with Division 26.


ONTARIO, OR




A. Engage in a factory authorized startup personnel to inspection, test and startup complete VRF

system. Testing and startup shall be in strict accordance with VRF manufacturers'

requirements.

B. Provide written startup report of system and report any defects or issues with system.

C. Remove and replace any malfunctioning devices.

D. Owner training shall be by factory authorized personnel.

E. Adjust fan settings and assist Test and Balance Contractor during balancing procedure.



ONTARIO, OR

ELECTRIC HEATERS 238239 - 1

SECTION 238239 - ELECTRIC HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils.

B. Section includes wall heaters with propeller fans and electric-resistance heating coils.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the


1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.

2. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company.

3. Indeeco.

4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.

5. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.

6. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products.


ONTARIO, OR


2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with

UL 2021.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 ELECTRIC HEATER

A. Front Panel: Extruded-aluminum bar grille with removable panels fastened with tamperproof

fasteners.

B. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color selected by

Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Surface-Mounted Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet.


A. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.5 COILS

A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and

60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant

metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16-inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal

box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.

1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit

controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.

2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.

2.6 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.

B. Motor: Permanently lubricated. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor

Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC Equipment."

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Control Devices:


ONTARIO, OR


1. Integral thermostat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before heater

installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install units level and plumb.

C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric

hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and

Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to

match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with

Drawings and room details before installation.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:



2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and

electrical connections.


ONTARIO, OR


3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters.



ONTARIO, OR.

DEMOLITION/REMODEL 260300 - 1

SECTION 260300 - DEMOLITION/REMODEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section describes general requirements and methods of execution relating to the

Demolition of portions of the electrical system for the Project.

1.2 DEMOLITION/REMODEL WORK

A. The Contractor shall carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications, visit the project site,

and make note of all existing conditions, dimensions, and limitations prior to Bid and make

allowances thereto.

B. No Change Orders shall be issued due to the Contractor's lack of knowledge of the existing

conditions of the Project and of the amount and difficulty of the remodel and/or demolition

work necessary for a complete installation of the systems shown.

C. The Contractor shall also notify all corporations, companies, individuals or local authorities

owning, or having jurisdiction over existing utilities and services which interfere in any manner

with the execution of the Work under this Contract, and shall remove, relocate or protect such

utilities or equipment as required by the parties having jurisdiction over same.

D. If existing active or nonactive services (which may not be shown on Plans) are encountered that

require relocation or disconnecting, the Electrical Contractor shall make written request for

decision on proper handling of the services. The Electrical Contractor shall not proceed with

the Work until so authorized by the Architect.

E. When areas of the existing buildings are adjacent to the area of construction in which work is

going on and are occupied, then this Contractor shall arrange the Work so as to reduce to a

minimum the periods of interruption or outages in the various services.

F. Not less than one week before any system is to be put out of service, the Contractor shall notify

and coordinate with other trades and the Owner of such necessity including the extent of the

Work to be done during the outage, possible length of time required for that phase of the Work,

and the desired time at which the outage is to begin.

G. Carefully lay out all work in advance to minimize cutting, channeling, or drilling. Where

necessary, all cutting and patching shall be done in a manner approved by the Architect. Do not

endanger the stability of the structure. Restore any damaged surfaces to original conditions.

Contractor at fault to assume all costs.

H. Remove or relocate existing conduits, wires, equipment, devices, or fixtures indicated on

Drawings and as required by remodel operations. Where the reuse of existing conduits, wires,

devices, or fixture is permitted, verify that wiring is continuous. Existing outlets or junction

boxes shall not be rendered inaccessible by structural changes made to the building. Where


ONTARIO, OR.

DEMOLITION/REMODEL 260300 - 2

existing walls are being furred out or refinished, extend existing outlets and devices to new

surface as required.

I. Existing equipment which is indicated as being removed and not indicated for re-use shall be

disposed of unless stated otherwise. Remove and dispose of any material, except fluorescent

lamps and ballasts. Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all removed lamps and

ballasts. Ballasts may contain PCB's and shall be disposed of according to environmental

regulations.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



ONTARIO, OR.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and all Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Common electrical installation requirements.


A. Comply with latest adopted IBC Codes, NFPA Codes, Elevator Codes, ANSI, UL, ADAAG,

and applicable Local and State Codes. Also comply with Utility Company regulations, industry

standards and Construction Documents.

B. Work shall be done by only trained, licensed and experienced workmen familiar with the

requirements.

C. All microprocessor based equipment and software with equipment shall utilize 4 digits for the

year part of all dates. A two digit date shall be an option for only for printing at Owner's

preference.

1.4 EXTENT OF DRAWINGS / SPECIFICATION

A. Drawings indicate intent and general layout of electrical systems for the Project. Drawings are

partly diagrammatic and do not indicate all fittings and accessories which may be required.

Provide such fittings and accessories as required to form a complete and operating system in

general conformance with Specifications and Drawings.

1.5 PRIOR APPROVALS

A. All products submitted for prior approval shall be received by the Engineer 10 business days

prior to Bid. Supply technical data, photometrics and dimensional Drawings showing that

substitutes are equal to product specified. Faxed prior approvals will not be accepted.


ONTARIO, OR.


1.6 DISCREPANCIES

A. Prior to submitting Bid, Contractor shall refer any apparent discrepancies or omissions to

Engineer for clarification. The more stringent provisions shall take precedence where codes,

Specifications and Drawings differ with one another. The Contractor shall Bid the more

expensive requirement, unless discrepancy is addressed by Addendum prior to Bid.

1.7 TEMPORARY LIGHTING/POWER

A. Provide temporary electrical power and lighting for all trades that require service during the

course of this Project. Provide temporary service and distribution as required. Comply with the

NEC and OSHA requirements. Energy Costs by General Contractor.

1.8 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

Submit for final and official approval through the General Contractor.

B. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,

containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

g. Category and type of submittal.

h. Submittal purpose and description.

i. Specification Section number and title.

j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

k. Indication of full or partial submittal.

l. Transmittal number.


ONTARIO, OR.


m. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

n. Remarks.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to

allow for electrical installations.

C. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete

and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient

flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing

in the building.

E. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections.

F. Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and

services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies,

and controlling agencies.

1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section

"Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate the

following installed conditions:

1. Actual location of all electrical service gear/feeders, panel/motor/special equipment

feeders, all major underground or underslab conduits, all conduit stubs for future use, any

change in branch circuitry from Drawings, key junction boxes and pull boxes not

indicated on Drawings, any control locations or indicator lights not shown on Drawings.

2. Addendum items, Change Order items and all changes made to Drawings from Bidding

phase through to Project completion.

3. Actual equipment and materials installed. Where manufacturer and catalog number are

indicated on Drawings, generally or in fixture or equipment schedules, change to reflect

actual products installed.

4. Change service panel and branch panel breaker locations and schedules to reflect actual

installed conditions.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." In

addition to the requirements specified in Division 01. Assemble O & M Manuals as follows:

1. Compile Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the electrical systems and equipment.

The manuals shall be provided to the Architect for approval complete and at one time,


ONTARIO, OR.


prior to requesting final payment. Partial or separate data will be returned for

completion.

2. Manuals shall be assembled in three-ring binders. Binders shall be 3 inches thick or less

and have slip sleeve jacket on binder side and front. More than one binder shall be used

for each set of data if required to prevent overfilling of one binder. All information shall

be arranged in Sections and each Section shall have a blank buff colored, heavy paper

divider with a protruding tab clearly labeled. Sections shall be arranged in the same order

that the equipment is listed in the Specification and each Specification Section shall have

a separate tab. Shop Drawings which are larger than 8-1/2-inch by 11 inch shall be

individually folded so they are 8-1/2-inch by 11 inch or less and inserted behind the

appropriate tab.

3. Tabs shall be labeled and arranged as follows:

a. Index: Furnish under the first tab an index of Sections listing name of Section and

Specification numbers.

b. Equipment Manufacturers: Furnish under the second tab a complete typed list of

equipment suppliers and manufacturers representative including type of

equipment, name, address and phone number. The company listed here should be

the one which could furnish replacement parts and offer technical information

about the equipment.

c. Product Literature: Each tab, starting with the third shall contain the name of a

Specification Section. Behind each tab shall be the previously submitted and

approved Shop Drawing, factory published operation and maintenance instructions

and parts lists. Also include description of function, normal operating

characteristics and limitations, engineering data and tests, and complete

nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. Manufacturer's

printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal

operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency

instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Maintenance

procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly,

repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. Servicing instructions

and lubrication charts and schedules.

4. Upon completion and approval of the booklets, one copy shall be given to the Architect,

and two to the Owner. Using the booklet, the Electrical Contractor shall explain in detail

and instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the correct operation and maintenance of

the equipment.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,

masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished

surfaces or otherwise concealed.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit

for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom

consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components

of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to

facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Aluminum building wire rated 600 V or less.

3. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

4. Photovoltaic cable, Type PV, rated 2000 V or less.

5. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 271200 "TVCC Network Cabling Specification" for twisted pair cabling used for

data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PV: Photovoltaic.

B. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

C. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.



B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Alpha Wire Company.

2. American Bare Conductor.

3. Belden Inc.

4. Cerro Wire LLC.

5. Encore Wire Corporation.

6. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

7. Okonite Company (The).

8. Service Wire Co.

9. Southwire Company.

10. WESCO.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8

for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.

2.2 ALUMINUM BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn aluminum current-carrying conductor

with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.





3. Belden Inc.

4. Cerro Wire LLC.


ONTARIO, OR.






9. WESCO.

C. Standards:



2. RoHS compliant.



D. Conductors: Aluminum, complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.


2.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an

overall metallic sheath.





3. Belden Inc.




7. Service Wire Co.


9. WESCO.

C. Standards:



2. Comply with UL 1569.

3. RoHS compliant.



D. Circuits:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Single circuit and multi-circuit with color-coded conductors.

2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424.

E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8

for stranded conductors. Aluminum, complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801.

F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

G. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.


H. Armor: Steel or Aluminum, interlocked.

I. Jacket: PVC applied over armor.

2.4 PHOTOVOLTAIC CABLE, TYPE PV

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V.




2. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.

3. Service Wire Co.


C. Standards:



2. RoHS compliant.



D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8

for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation: Comply with UL 44 and UL 4703.

2.5 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,

type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


ONTARIO, OR.




1. 3M Electrical Products.

2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.

3. Gardner Bender.

4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

5. Ideal Industries, Inc.

6. ILSCO.

7. NSi Industries LLC.

8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

9. Service Wire Co.

10. TE Connectivity Ltd.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set

screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.

D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper or Aluminum.

2. Type: One or Two hole with standard barrels.

3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4

AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8

AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger.

C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2,

single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,



ONTARIO, OR.


C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in

raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. PV Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.3 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2,


B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2,


C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,


D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in

raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. PV Circuits: Type USE-2 for PV source circuits rated at 600 V or less.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 283100 "Fire Detection and Alarm" for connecting,

terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for


B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special

applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.

2. Foundation steel electrodes.




A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified

in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations of system described in "Field

Quality Control" Article, including the following:


ONTARIO, OR.


1) Ground rods.

2) Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

b. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding

connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective

action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Advanced Lightning Technology, Ltd.

2. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

3. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.

4. ERICO International Corporation.

5. Fushi Copperweld Inc.

6. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.

7. Harger Lightning & Grounding.

8. ILSCO.

9. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

10. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

11. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.

12. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless

otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4-inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16-inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16-inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 6 inches in cross section,

with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply

with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at

5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,

tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, aluminum or copper rated for direct burial terminal

with set screw.

I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud

lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

J. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.

K. Straps: Solid copper, cast-bronze clamp or copper lugs. Rated for 600 A.

L. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal two-piece clamp.

M. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.


ONTARIO, OR.


N. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts.

a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Die-cast zinc alloy.

b. Listed for direct burial.

2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector or copper ground

connector rated for direct burial.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4-inch by 10 feet.

B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with

nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts.

1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches long.

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

C. Ground Plates: 1/4-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG

minimum.

1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.

C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe.

D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continuous

yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to

normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of

green and two bands of yellow.

E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.


ONTARIO, OR.


F. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be

connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,

humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct

and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor

connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit

or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway


ONTARIO, OR.


fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a

separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with

branch-circuit conductors.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections.

3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.


ONTARIO, OR.


E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to

bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

G. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a

minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of

foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor

bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid

or to grounding electrode external to concrete.

H. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct

contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.




B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual

ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.


ONTARIO, OR.


b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



ONTARIO, OR.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and

installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the

applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



ONTARIO, OR.


1. Steel slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete

materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Construction Drawings,

Sheet S001.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or

cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces

as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials in which used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.


ONTARIO, OR.


4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel

shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4-inch in

diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above

suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.


ONTARIO, OR.


Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers

and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means

that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Construction Drawings, Sheet S001.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous

metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Surface raceways.

5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. EMT: Electrical metallic conduit.

E. ENT: Electrical non-metallic conduit.

F. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

G. LFMC: Liquid flexible metal conduit.

H. LFNC: Liquid flexible non-metallic conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Metal Conduit:

1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

3. ARC: Not allowed.

4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

a. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

b. Coating Thickness: 0.040-inch (1 mm), minimum.

6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

B. Metal Fittings:

1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and

NFPA 70.

5. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Setscrew.

6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040-inch (1 mm),

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

D. Comply with TIA-569-D for communication systems applications.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Nonmetallic Conduit:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Fiberglass:

a. Comply with NEMA TC 14.

b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways.

c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways.

3. ENT: Not allowed.

4. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC with EPC-80 PVC fittings, complying with NEMA TC 2 and

UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

5. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

6. Rigid HDPE: Not allowed.

7. Continuous HDPE: Not allowed.

8. Coilable HDPE: Not allowed.

9. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14.

B. Nonmetallic Fittings:

1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.

2. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and

material.

a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, type as indicated on

Construction Documents, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

C. Tele-Power Poles:

1. See Construction Documents for the specified product.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as

required for complete system.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. Comply with TIA-569-D for

communications systems.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

D. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. See Construction Drawings for specified product.

2. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable (only where called out on Construction

Documents).

1. See Construction Drawings for specified product.

2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and

marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.


ONTARIO, OR.


J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, NEMA, enclosure type as

indicated on Construction Documents with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless


1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, NEMA enclosure type as indicated on Construction Documents, galvanized-

steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with

manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or "COMMUNICATIONS" or as

indicated for each service type.

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance

with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by

manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying

with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

2.8 COMMUNICATION CABLING HOOKS

A. Description: Pre-fabricated sheet metal cable supports for communications cabling.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL and marked for intended location

and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

3. Steel J type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC with Type EPC-80-PVC fittings.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations


a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum

raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings are not allowed.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of

raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. Comply with NECA 105,

NECA III and TIA-569-D for communication systems.

C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating

equipment.

D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.

E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any electrical power or lighting

conduit. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.


ONTARIO, OR.


I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to

NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material

and size involved.

J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install

conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

M. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound


O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

P. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

Q. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal

bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated

throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

R. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

S. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

T. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter

or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.


ONTARIO, OR.


U. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

V. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and

nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50-feet.

2. 1-inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75-feet.

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes

or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these

requirements.

W. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.

Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue

are not acceptable support methods.

X. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

Y. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building.

4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment.

5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain

different pressure set points.

6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Z. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

AA. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install

in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental

temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds

100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:


ONTARIO, OR.


a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041-inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install

fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078-inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

BB. Communications Cabling Hooks:

1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity

limits.

2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or

support rods.

3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables

shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings,

luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical

and communications equipment.

4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c.

5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.

CC. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of

flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

DD. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. Install boxes with height measured to center of

box unless otherwise indicated.

EE. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

FF. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

GG. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

HH. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.


ONTARIO, OR.


II. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

JJ. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

KK. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in

nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried

conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of

conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553

"Identification for Electrical Systems"

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,

as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm

lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve

adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



ONTARIO, OR.

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 1

SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Restraint channel bracings.

2. Restraint cables.

3. Seismic-restraint accessories.

4. Mechanical anchor bolts.

5. Adhesive anchor bolts.


1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used

electrical supports and installation requirements.



1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member

of ICC-ES or OSHPD.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall

bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum

seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations.

If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.

Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs

must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: See Construction Drawing S001.

2. Building Risk Category: See Construction Drawing S001.

3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by maximum area of component projected on vertical

plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: See Construction Drawing S001.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: See

Construction Drawing S001.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5.

c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): See Construction

Drawing S001.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: See Construction Drawing

S001.

2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS

A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel

channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant

coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.


ONTARIO, OR.


2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES

A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A603 galvanized steel cables. End connections made of steel

assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;

with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted

connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers

to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid

equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size

of attachment devices used.

E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488.

2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane

methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.

Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless

steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as

tested according to ASTM E488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps

approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or OSHPD.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads

within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125-inch.

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES or OSHPD providing required submittals for component.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.

Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to

installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole

and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air

pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways

where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different

structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a

different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION 260548.16


ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Underground-line warning tape.

5. Warning labels and signs.

6. Instruction signs.

7. Equipment identification labels.

8. Miscellaneous identification products.

9. Receptacle labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's

wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,

standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,

flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching

wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway and cable size. Utilize same label mediums as identified in Part 2.1

above.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend

label.

C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.

3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-

inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.

White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and

application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location

(exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.


ONTARIO, OR.


D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete

envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface

preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install

labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Junction Boxes within Buildings: Identify each exposed or accessible junction and

pull box with spray paint and with permanent marker indicating voltage and contained circuits.

Example: "480 V, H1-26." Apply spray paint to identify the system type as follows:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red.

2. Emergency: Orange.

3. Communications: Green.

4. Mechanical/Electrical Supervisory System: Blue.

5. Security Systems: Yellow.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less:

a. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or

taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible

unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

b. Apply Colors as Follows:

208Y / 120 Volts Phase 480 / 277 Volts

Black A Brown

Red B Purple

Blue C Yellow

White Neutral Grey

Green Ground Green

D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.


ONTARIO, OR.


E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

H. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs

with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red

background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used

for power transfer.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is

provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with

1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required,

use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.


ONTARIO, OR.


d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of

the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated

acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Switchboards.

e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.

g. Enclosed switches.

h. Enclosed circuit breakers.

i. Enclosed controllers.

j. Power transfer equipment.

k. Contactors.

l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

m. Power-generating units.

n. Monitoring and control equipment.

K. Receptacle Circuit Labels: Identify all 120 VAC and 208 VAC power receptacle cover plates

with serving panel and circuit number designation. Utilize clear self-adhesive label with black

letters. Example: "L3 - 25."



ONTARIO, OR.

SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 1

SECTION 260573.13 - SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting

capacity of circuit protective devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing to remain

items shall remain functional throughout the construction period.

B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and

the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of

NETA.

C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the

course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used

therein.

D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains,

and distributes computer software used for power system studies.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and

documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.

F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes

the affected portion of the circuit from the system.

G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to

the wiring system of the premises served.

I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."


ONTARIO, OR.



A. Product Data:

1. For computer software program to be used for studies.

2. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals.

Submittals may be in digital form.

a. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets.

b. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

1) Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of

distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause

delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for

preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of

devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

2) Revised one-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of

short-circuit study.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance

manuals.

2. The following are from the Short-Circuit Study Report:

a. Final one-line diagram.

b. Final Short-Circuit Study Report.

c. Short-circuit study data files.

d. Power system data.


A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed

specifically for power system analysis.

B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this

Section.

C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

1. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: Computer program shall be designed to

perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add-on module designed

to perform short-circuit studies.


ONTARIO, OR.


D. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state

where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct

supervision and control of this professional engineer.

E. Short-Circuit Study Certification: Short-Circuit Study Report shall be signed and sealed by

Power Systems Analysis Specialist.

F. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:

1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power

Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.

2. A member company of NETA.

3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS



1. CGI CYME.

2. EDSA Micro Corporation.

3. ESA Inc.

4. Operation Technology, Inc.

5. Power Analytics, Corporation.

6. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.

1. Analytical features of power systems analysis software program shall have capability to

calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary of study findings.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and

guide for interpretation of results.

C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.


ONTARIO, OR.


4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations and ratings.

6. Derating factors and environmental conditions.

7. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements or revisions in a written document,

separate from one-line diagram.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to available short-circuit

currents. Verify that equipment withstand ratings exceed available short-circuit current at

equipment installation locations.

2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties.

3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors

at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to

or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data:

1. One-line diagram of system being studied.

2. Power sources available.

3. Manufacturer, model, and interrupting rating of protective devices.

4. Conductors.

5. Transformer data.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output Reports:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the

following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage.

b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.

c. Fault-point X/R ratio.

d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.

b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.


d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.


ONTARIO, OR.


2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.

3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.



d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.

e. Equivalent impedance.

f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis.

g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to

Architect's attention.

2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under

provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with

requirements in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for recording circuit protective

device characteristics. Record data on a Record Document copy of one-line diagram. Comply

with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in

the field. Field data gathering shall be under direct supervision and control of the engineer in

charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds

NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III

certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent

protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent

with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,

input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.

5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance.

6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

7. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.


ONTARIO, OR.


8. Conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or

nonmagnetic).

9. Derating factors.

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent

protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.

2. Exclude equipment rated 240 V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout

electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and

alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and

asynchronous generators and apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also

account for the fault-current dc decrement to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting

equipment.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and a

single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as

defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

I. Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity.



ONTARIO, OR.

ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 1

SECTION 260573.19 - ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance

and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical

equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and

the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of

NETA.

C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the

course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used

therein.

D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains,

and distributes computer software used for power system studies.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and

documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.

F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes

the affected portion from the system.

G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to

the wiring system of the premises served.

I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."


ONTARIO, OR.



A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective

devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form:

1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist.

3. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment

submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing,

obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to

ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Provide maintenance procedures in equipment manuals according to requirements in

NFPA 70E.

2. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's

personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.


A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed

specifically for power system analysis.

B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this

Section.

C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer

software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on

electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Computer program shall be designed to perform arc-flash analysis or have a function,

component, or add-on module designed to perform arc-flash analysis.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of

performing the arc-flash study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations,

licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under

the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

F. Arc-Flash Study Certification: Arc-Flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power

Systems Analysis Specialist.


ONTARIO, OR.


G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:

1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power

Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.

2. A member company of NETA.

3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS



1. CGI CYME.

2. EDSA Micro Corporation.

3. ESA Inc.

4. Operation Technology, Inc.

5. Power Analytics, Corporation.

6. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the

capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in

IEEE 399.

2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT

A. Executive summary of study findings.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and

guide for interpretation of results.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings, including derating factors and

environmental conditions.

4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, panelboard designations, and ratings.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output Data: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports"

Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-Circuit

Studies."


ONTARIO, OR.


F. Arc-Flash Study Output Reports:

1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the

following for each equipment location included in the report:

a. Voltage.



d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.

e. Equivalent impedance.

f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis.

g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

G. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1. Arcing fault magnitude.

2. Protective device clearing time.

3. Duration of arc.

4. Arc-flash boundary.

5. Restricted approach boundary.

6. Limited approach boundary.

7. Working distance.

8. Incident energy.

9. Hazard risk category.

10. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

H. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of

terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self-

adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch self-adhesive equipment label for each

work location included in the analysis.

B. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD,"

and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

1. Location designation.

2. Nominal voltage.

3. Protection boundaries.

a. Arc-flash boundary.

b. Restricted approach boundary.

c. Limited approach boundary.

4. Required minimum arc rating of PPE in Cal/cm squared.

5. Available incident energy.

6. Working distance.


ONTARIO, OR.


7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only

after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that

have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Preparatory Studies: Perform the Short-Circuit study prior to starting the Arc-Flash Hazard

Analysis.

1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports"

Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-

Circuit Studies."

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

1. Maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall

assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

2. Calculate arc-flash energy at 85 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to

IEEE 1584 recommendations.

3. Calculate arc-flash energy at 38 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to

NFPA 70E recommendations.

4. Calculate arc-flash energy with the utility contribution at a minimum and assume no

motor contribution.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in electrical

distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except equipment rated 240 V ac or less

fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.

F. Calculate the limited, restricted, and prohibited approach boundaries for each location.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when

performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall

take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or

decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as

follows:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Fault contribution from induction motors shall not be considered beyond three to five

cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators shall be decayed to match the

actual decrement of each as closely as possible (for example, contributions from

permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after

10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a circuit

breaker. However, arc-flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load

side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.

2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum

clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram on Drawings and under

"Preparatory Studies" Paragraph in "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" Article. Call

discrepancies to Architect's attention.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics from approved submittals under provisions of

action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply

with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required

to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control

of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its

representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power

Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved

in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags

that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective

device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance or available short circuit current at the service.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground).

5. Full-load current of all loads.

6. Voltage level at each bus.

7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.

8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance.

9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker

settings.

10. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.


ONTARIO, OR.


11. Low-voltage conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic).

3.4 LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label on the front cover of each section of the equipment for each

equipment included in the study. Base arc-flash label data on highest values calculated at each

location.

B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc-flash label applied to it:

1. Low voltage transformers.

2. Panelboard and safety switch over 250 V.

3. Applicable panelboard and safety switch under 250 V.

C. Note on record Drawings the location of equipment where the personnel could be exposed to

arc-flash hazard during their work.

1. Indicate arc-flash energy.

2. Indicate protection level required.

3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install arc-flash warning labels under the direct supervision and control of Power System

Analysis Specialist.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage Power Systems Analysis Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in potential

arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of arc-

flash warning labels.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches.

2. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching and dimming controls.

3. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

4. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.

5. Digital timer light switches.

6. Wall-box Dimmers.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for non-networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors,

and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors including the

following:

1. Provide full size floor plan drawings with each lighting control device, how the devices

interconnect with wiring and how the devices function.

2. Mounting hardware for each installation types.

3. For each occupancy type, indicate technology types, special features, amperage data,

sensor coverage, ideal sensor placement, adjustability parameters and default sensor

settings.

4. For each Power pack relay type, indicate the contact amperage and voltage ratings and

documentation on how many occupancy sensors can be supported.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On USB media. Provide names, versions, and website

addresses for locations of installed software.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control

devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Faulty operation of lighting control software.

b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.

2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke

detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES



1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

3. Intermatic, Inc.

4. Invensys Controls.

5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.



B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying

with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Contact Configuration: SPST.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac.

4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule

that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.

5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a

program on selected channels.

6. Astronomic Time: All channels.

7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.

8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS




2. Eaton Corporation.

3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.


5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.


7. Sensor Switch, Inc.


9. Watt Stopper.

B. System Description: System operates indoor lighting.

C. Sequence of Operation: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the

indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.

1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a. When no daylight is present (target level).

b. When significant daylight is present.

D. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with integrated power

pack, that detects changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

E. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate power

pack, that detects changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:


intended location and application.

2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C).

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying with

UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered by the power pack.

4. Sensor Output: Digital signal compatible with power pack.

5. Zone: Single.


ONTARIO, OR.


6. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A

tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2

power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

a. LED status lights to indicate load status.

b. Plenum rated.

7. General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 20 to 60 fc (215 to 640 lux), with

an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

8. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling.

9. Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with deadband adjustment of 25, 50, and 75 percent above

the "on" set point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and "off" set points.

10. Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings check.

11. Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct.

12. Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS



1. Bryant Electric.



4. Intermatic, Inc.



7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.


9. Philips Lighting Controls.

10. RAB Lighting.


12. Square D.

13. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand.

B. General Requirements for Sensors:

1. Wall-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

2. Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors

3. Passive infrared, Ultrasonic and Dual technology.

4. Integrated power pack.


intended location and application.

6. Operation:

a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area

is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning

lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.


ONTARIO, OR.


b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and

sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning

lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

c. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to

turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied,

or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for

turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

7. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.

8. Power: Line voltage.

9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for

13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA,

Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

10. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal

operation of sensor.

12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.

13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights

off when selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and

movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.

2. Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular

area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when

mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-

degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 48

inches above finished floor.

D. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR

and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that

control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of

average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical

manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area

of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.


ONTARIO, OR.


4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-

degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 48

inches above finished floor.

2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS



1. Bryant Electric.



4. Intermatic, Inc.






10. RAB Lighting.


12. Square D.


B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on-

off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


intended location and application, and shall comply with California Title 24.

2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage

area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights

off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C).

4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA ballast or LED load at 120 V.

2.5 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH





3. Intermatic, Inc.

4. Invensys Controls.





ONTARIO, OR.


B. Description: Combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting control unit.

Switchbox-mounted, backlit LCD display, with selectable time interval in 10 minute

increments.

1. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 amps at 277-V ac

for ballast or LED, and 1/4 horsepower at 120-V ac.

2. Integral relay for connection to BAS.

3. Voltage: 120 V.

4. Color: White.

5. Faceplate: Color matched to switch.

2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS



1. Bryant Electric.



4. Intermatic, Inc.






10. RAB Lighting.


12. Square D.


B. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,

with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

C. Control: Continuously adjustable; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with

UL 1472.

D. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to

adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20

percent of full brightness.

2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12

AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not

smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than

No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are

wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be

installed.


3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke

detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION


B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-

borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration

isolators.



B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2-inch.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless



ONTARIO, OR.


E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.

2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.




B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual

occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy

hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set

time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's

operations.

3.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial

Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for

using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the system and

to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.



ONTARIO, OR.

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. General lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

3. Lighting control panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage

suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and

finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.


ONTARIO, OR.


e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.


C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

balancing.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Construction Drawings, Sheet S001.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:

a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.

c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

d. Square D.


ONTARIO, OR.


2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in

Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on the Construction Documents.

1. NEMA rating as indicated on Construction Documents Panel Schedules and Risers.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Standard Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door

within door hinged trim cover.

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or

primer coat.

6. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside

panelboard door.

C. Phase and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground

conductors; bonded to box.

3. Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated minimum 100 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.

4. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

E. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main

service disconnect switches.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for

future installation of devices.

2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with

tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door


ONTARIO, OR.


shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and

bus shall remain concealed.

B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker with minimum of adjustable magnetic

trip, or as indicated on the Construction Documents.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in

circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for

removal.

D. Breakers with 1200 amp frame or larger shall be equipment with an Arc Flash Energy-reducing

maintenance switching with local status indicator.

2.5 GENERAL LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units. Coordinate paragraph below with Drawings.

B. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with

tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door

shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and

bus shall remain concealed.

2.6 LOAD CENTERS

A. Not allowed, unless specifically specified elsewhere in the Specifications or Construction

Documents.

2.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault

currents. Breaker type shall be thermal magnetic, unless indicated otherwise in Construction

Documents Schedules or as required by manufacturer.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 50 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Standard Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes,

trip ratings, and number of poles.

a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.


ONTARIO, OR.


b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and

refrigerating equipment.

4. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Special Features and Accessories: (Only where indicated in

Construction Documents Schedules or notes.)

a. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip

sensitivity, 5-mA trip for breakers serving GFCI receptacle circuits.

b. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent

of rated voltage.

B. Breakers with 1200 amp frame or larger shall be equipment with an Arc Flash Energy-reducing

maintenance switching with local status indicator.

2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent

protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Furnish portable test set to test functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from

panelboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. When applicable, comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26

Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts

uniformly flush with wall finish.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain

approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten

directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.4 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.



ONTARIO, OR.

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.

2. USB receptacles.

3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A.

4. Twist-locking receptacles.

5. Pendant cord-connector devices.

6. Cord and plug sets.

7. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A.

8. Wall plates.

9. Floor service fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking

wall plates.


ONTARIO, OR.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.


C. RoHS compliant.

D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.

E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section.

F. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

G. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated

or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Essential Electrical System: Red.

H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single

source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).


ONTARIO, OR.


b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding.

3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.

4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.

B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only

when a plug is inserted in the receptacle.


4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.

5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant

Receptacles" Article.

C. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only

when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.


4. Standards: Comply with UL 498.

5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet

Locations" Article.

2.3 USB RECEPTACLES

A. USB Charging Receptacles:


ONTARIO, OR.




the following:





2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-

plated, brass mounting strap.

3. USB Receptacles: Dual, USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum).

4. Standards: Comply with UL 1310 and USB 3.0 devices.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A

A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two

pole, three wire, and self-grounding.


4. Type: Non-feed through.

5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two

pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is

inserted in the receptacle.


4. Type: Non-feed through.

5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.


ONTARIO, OR.


6. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant

Receptacles" Article.

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 120 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R.


B. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 250 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L6-20R.


2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, heavy-duty grade.



the following:





B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable

grip.

D. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel wire

strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding

connector.

E. Standards: Comply with FS W-C-596.

2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment

being connected.

B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-

insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for

connection.

2.8 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A

A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

B. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:



the following:





2. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

C. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


ONTARIO, OR.




the following:





2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

2.9 WALL PLATES

A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices.

B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Flush-Type Floor Service Fittings:



the following:

a. Wiremold


c. Steel City.

2. Description: Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method

used, with cover flush with finished floor.

3. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

4. Service Plate and Cover: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

5. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise

indicated.

6. Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for twisted

pair cable, complying with requirements in Section 271200 "TVCC Network Cabling

Specification."

B. Above-Floor Service Fittings:


ONTARIO, OR.




the following:

a. Wiremold


c. Steel City.

2. Description: Type: Modular, above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method

used.

3. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

4. Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

5. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise

indicated.

6. Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for twisted

pair cable, complying with requirements in Section 271200 "TVCC Cabling

Specification."

2.11 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness.



1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

2. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete,

matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

D. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

E. Multioutlet Harness:

1. Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying

with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

2. Receptacle Spacing: As noted on Construction Drawings.

3. Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, s noted on Construction Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against

outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,

multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not

required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers

or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated

digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Tests for Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

5. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




ONTARIO, OR.

FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V and less for use in switches, switchboards, controllers and

motor-control centers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings.

2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.

4. Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

1. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local

ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and


1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"


a. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

b. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.

c. Ambient temperature adjustment information.


ONTARIO, OR.

FUSES 262813 - 2


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from a single manufacturer.



intended use.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more

than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Cooper Bussman, Inc.

2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.; Cooper Industries, Inc.

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

4. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated;

voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes

and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.


ONTARIO, OR.

FUSES 262813 - 3

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to

fuse ratings.


3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay or RK1, time delay.

B. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay.

C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

D. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.



ONTARIO, OR.

FUSES 262813 - 4



ONTARIO, OR.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit

breakers:

1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Molded-case circuit breakers.

4. Molded-case switches.

5. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data

on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current rating.

4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.

5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches

and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in

Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following:

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."





D. Manufacturer's field service report.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01

Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.




intended use.


C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers from one

manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg.


ONTARIO, OR.


2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other

construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required

workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer.

2. General Electric Company.

3. Siemens.

4. Square D.

2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to

accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and

interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Nonfusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type GD, lockable handle with

capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades

open.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault

currents. Breaker type shall be thermal magnetic, unless indicated otherwise in Construction

Documents Schedules or as required by manufacturer.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 50 A and larger.


ONTARIO, OR.


2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Standard Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes,

trip ratings, and number of poles.

a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and

refrigerating equipment.

4. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Special Features and Accessories: (Only where indicated in

Construction Documents Schedules or notes.)

a. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip

sensitivity, 5-mA trip for breakers serving GFCI receptacle circuits.

b. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent

of rated voltage.

c. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit breaker operation; key

shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Flush or surface mounted and NEMA rating as indicated on Construction Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural

engineer.

B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Construction

Drawings, Sheet S001.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation

of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height,

unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26 Section

"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,

Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify

compliance with test parameters.

3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air

to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS 263100 - 1

SECTION 263100 - PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. PV system description.

2. Manufactured PV units.

3. PV module framing.

4. PV array construction.

5. Inverters.

6. System overcurrent protection.

7. Mounting structures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ETFE: Ethylene tetrafluoroethylene.

B. FEP: Fluorinated ethylene propylene.

C. IP Code: Required ingress protection to comply with IEC 60529.

D. MPPT: Maximum power point tracking.

E. PTC: PVUSA Test Condition. Commonly regarded as a "real-world" measure of PV output. See

below for definition of "PVUSA."

F. PV: Photovoltaic.

G. PVUSA: Photovoltaics for Utility Systems Applications.

H. STC: Standard Test Conditions defined in IEC 61215.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for PV panels.


ONTARIO, OR.


2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For PV modules.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.



connection.

3. Detail fabrication and assembly.

4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For PV modules to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of PV

modules that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Manufacturer's materials and workmanship warranties include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Faulty operation of PV modules: Manufacturer to cover 100 percent of repair and

replacement costs.

b. Faulty operation of inverters.

2. Warranty Period:

a. 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Minimum Power Output Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of PV modules that fail to exhibit the minimum power output within

specified warranty period. Special warranty, applying to modules only, applies to materials

only, on a prorated basis, for period specified.

1. Manufacturer's minimum power output warranties include, but are not limited to, the

following warranty periods, from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Specified minimum power output to 90 percent or more, for a period of 25 years.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2.2 PV CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Refer to drawings and provide specified products, or pre-bid approved equal.

2.3 PV SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

A. Interactive PV System: Collectors connected in parallel to the electrical utility; and capable of

providing power for Project and supplying power to a distributed network.

1. An 84-module array to generate a total nominal rated output of 31,080 W.

2. System Components:

a. PV modules.

b. Array frame.

c. Utility-interactive microinverters.

d. Overcurrent protection, disconnect, and rapid shutdown devices.

e. Mounting structure.

f. Utility meter.

2.4 MANUFACTURED PV UNITS

A. Cell Materials: Monocrystalline

1. c-Si.

B. Module Construction:

1. Nominal Size: 42.2 inches (1046 mm) wide by 62 inches (1558 mm) long.

2. Weight: 41 lb (18.6 kg).

C. Front Panel: Fully tempered glass with Antireflective coating.

D. Bypass Diode Protection: Internal.

E. Junction Box:

1. Size: 1.56 by 3.96 by 0.52-inch (39.6 by 100.6 by 13.2 mm).

2. Fully potted, vandal resistant.

3. Flammability Test: UL 1703.

F. Output Cabling:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Quick, multiconnect, polarized connectors, compatible with inverters provided.

2.5 PV MODULE FRAMING

A. PV laminates mounted in anodized extruded-aluminum frames.

1. Entire assembly UL listed for electrical and fire safety according to UL 1703, and

complying with IEC 61215.

2. Frame strength exceeding requirements of certifying agencies in subparagraph above.

3. Finish: Anodized aluminum.

a. Alloy and temper recommended by framing manufacturer for strength, corrosion

resistance, and application of required finish.

b. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.6 PV ARRAY CONSTRUCTION

A. Framing:

1. Material: Extruded aluminum

2. Maximum System Weight: Less than 5 lb/sq. ft. (19.53 kg/sq. m).

3. Raceway Cover Plates: Aluminum.

2.7 INVERTER

A. Inverter Type: Microinverter.

B. Inverters shall be compatible with PV modules provided, and have the following Electrical

Characteristics:

1. Maximum Recommended PV Input Power: 440W.

2. Communications Interface: Ethernet and Wifi.

3. Utility Interface: Utility-interactive inverter.

C. Operating Conditions:

1. Operating Ambient Temperatures: Minus 4 to plus 122 deg F (20 to plus 50 deg C).

2. Storage Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 122 deg F (minus 40 to plus 50 deg C).

3. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent, noncondensing.

D. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Protective Functions:

a. AC over/undervoltage.

b. AC over/underfrequency.

c. Ground overcurrent.

d. Overtemperature.


ONTARIO, OR.


e. AC and dc overcurrent.

f. DC overvoltage.

3. Standard LCD, four lines, 20 characters, with user display and on/off toggle switch.

E. Disconnects: Rated for system voltage and conductor.

F. Regulatory Approvals:

1. IEEE 1547.1.

2. IEEE 1547.3.

3. UL 1741.

2.8 MOUNTING STRUCTURES

A. Rail Mount: Extruded aluminum, with feet appropriate for existing roof surface

B. Mounting structure shall be provided with WEEB or equal grounding washers, or bare copper

conductors, as required to ground system in accordance with AHJ requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until mounting surfaces have been properly prepared.

B. If preparation of mounting surfaces is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Examine modules and array frame before installation. Reject modules and arrays that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

D. Examine roofs, supports, and supporting structures for suitable conditions where PV system will

be installed.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate layout and installation of PV panels with roof and support assembly and other

construction.

C. Support PV panel assemblies independent of supports for other elements such as roof and

support assemblies, enclosures, vents, pipes, and conduits. Support assembly to prevent twisting

from eccentric loading.


ONTARIO, OR.


D. Install PV modules, inverters, rapid shutdown, and system monitoring in locations indicated on

Drawings.

E. Install weatherseal fittings and flanges where PV panel assemblies penetrate exterior elements

such as walls or roofs. Seal around openings to make weathertight. See Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants" for materials and application.

F. Wiring Method:

1. Cabling from panels to microinverters, and between microinverters shall be routed along

rails utilizing clips provided by cable manufacturer.

2. Other wiring shall be in conduit, refer to section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for

Electrical Systems.

G. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess

and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and

distribution spools.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate PV panel cabling to equipment enclosures to ensure proper connections.

B. Coordinate installation of utility-interactive meter with utility.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

D. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.



ONTARIO, OR.

LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology.

2. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and

contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.


ONTARIO, OR.


5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.

6. Include compliance of LED Luminaries with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation





intended use.


C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

D. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

E. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color

consistency among luminaires.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipping.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.

1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of

any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully

operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated

class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

F. Compliance with ANSI C78.377 "Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting

Products".

G. Compliance with UL 8750 "Safety Standard for Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for

Use in Lighting Products".

H. Compliance with LM-79 "Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting

Products" and LM-80 "Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources".

I. CRI of minimum 80 or as specified on the construction documents.

J. Minimum allowable efficacy of 60 lumens per watt for downlights, 90 lumens per watt

minimum for other LED fixtures or as specified on the construction documents schedules.

K. Rated lamp life of 50,000 minimum hours or as specified on the construction documents

schedules, whichever is more stringent.

L. Dimmable from 100 percent to 1 percent.

M. RoHS or equivalent compliance.

N. Fully serviceable and upgradeable LED light engine.


ONTARIO, OR.


O. LED Driver/Power Supply:

1. Integral high efficiency driver with power supply of 120V-277V input at 60HZ.

2. Power factor greater than 0.9 at full load.

3. THD at < 20 percent.

4. Drive current at 1000ma maximum.

5. Class 2 power supply.

6. Dimming utilizing 0-10V dimming control.

7. The Driver shall provide continuous flicker free dimming from 100 percent to 1 percent.

8. Capable of being serviced from above or through the aperture.

9. Protected from overload and short circuit conditions.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining

components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS


for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

C. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless

steel, 12 gage.


ONTARIO, OR.


D. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate support recommended by

fixture manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install

new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire.

3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls or attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate

attached to wall structural members.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.


ONTARIO, OR.


G. Surface mounted lighting fixtures shall be attached to the ceiling system with positive clamping

devices that completely surround the supporting members. Safety wires shall be attached

between the clamping device and the adjacent ceiling hanger or to the structure above. In no

case shall the fixture exceed the design carrying capacity of the supporting members.

H. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire

oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or

rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods

to building structure.

I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. All lighting fixtures shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system by

mechanical means as specified in the National Electrical Code, Section 410-36(b) unless

independently supported. The attachment device, a minimum of two per fixture, shall

have a capacity of 100 percent of the lighting fixture weight acting in any direction.

2. Pendant-hung lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from the structure above using

No. 9-gauge wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension

system for direct support.

3. For seismic design classifications of C, D, E and F and all Hospital work, lighting

fixtures weighing between 10 and 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements

outlined above, two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the fixture housing to the

structure above. These wires may be slack.

4. Lighting fixtures weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the

structure above by approved hangers.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 1

SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Emergency lighting units.

2. Exit signs.

3. Luminaire supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered

supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting

support.


2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions.

3. Battery and charger for light units.

4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.

5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type.


ONTARIO, OR.


a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.





connection.



A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of






D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency,



A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's

laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for

Energy Efficient Lighting Products.



before shipping.


ONTARIO, OR.


1.9 WARRANTY




a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.

b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and color retention, and other materials

beyond normal weathering.

d. Led Modules or Driver failure.

2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



according to ASCE/SEI 7




2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING



B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to

comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.

F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61.

G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.

H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory

mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast.


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Emergency Connection: Operate LED module(s) continuously upon loss of normal power

(see Construction Document schedules for lumen output). Connect unswitched circuit to

battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire driver.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

3. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp continuously.

4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire

or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.

7. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated

by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

I. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more

lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.

1. Emergency Connection: Emergency Connection: Operate LED module(s) continuously

upon loss of normal power (see Construction Document Schedules for lumen output).

Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to

luminaire driver.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

3. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp in a remote luminaire continuously.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

6. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote

from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance

recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less.

7. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

8. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.


ONTARIO, OR.


9. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

10. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated

by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,

relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and

floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared

receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply,

providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:

1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions.

2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling

accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS



B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting

luminaires will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:



3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.


ONTARIO, OR.


E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls or attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate


2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

F. Surface mounted lighting fixtures shall be attached to the ceiling system with positive clamping

devices that completely surround the supporting members. Safety wires shall be attached

between the clamping device and the adjacent ceiling hanger or to the structure above. In no

case shall the fixture exceed the design carrying capacity of the supporting members.

G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. All lighting fixtures shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system by

mechanical means as specified in the National Electrical Code, Section 410-16(c) unless

independently supported. The attachment device, a minimum of two per fixture, shall

have a capacity of 100 percent of the lighting fixture weight acting in any direction.

2. Pendant-hung lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from the structure above using

No. 9-gauge wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension

system for direct support.

3. For seismic design classifications of C, D, E and F and all Hospital work, lighting

fixtures weighing between 10 and 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements

outlined above, two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the fixture housing to the

structure above. These wires may be slack.

4. Lighting fixtures weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the

structure above by approved hangers.

H. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION





1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.

Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.



ONTARIO, OR.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service:

1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to

conduct short-duration test.

2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour

discharge test.



ONTARIO, OR.

LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265619 - 1

SECTION 265619 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior solid-state luminaires (including wall mounted) that are designed for and

exclusively use LED lamp technology.

2. Luminaire supports.

3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays or sensors.


1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and

contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire.

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.


3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire.

4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data.


ONTARIO, OR.


5. Include compliance of LED Luminaries with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

6. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring.

7. Photoelectric relays.

8. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable

for components involved.



2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires, photoelectric relays and related controls to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers'

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color

consistency among luminaires.



prior to shipping.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with

luminaire installation.

1.9 WARRANTY




a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.


ONTARIO, OR.


b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and color retention, and other materials

beyond normal weathering.

d. LED Modules or Driver failure.

2. Warranty Period: 5 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.




2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS



B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of

hazard by an NRTL.

C. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

E. Compliance with ANSI C78.377 "Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting

Products."

F. Compliance with UL 8750 "Safety Standard for Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for

Use in Lighting Products."

G. Compliance with LM-79 "Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting

Products" and LM-80 "Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources."

H. UL Listed for wet locations. Light engines are IP66 rated; luminaire is IP65 rated. Rated for

minus 40°C minimum ambient.

I. CRI of 80 minimum. CCT as indicated on Luminaire schedule.

J. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours minimum.

K. Dimmable: Only as indicated on the drawing lighting schedules.


ONTARIO, OR.


L. Minimum allowable efficacy of 60 lumens per watt for CCT of 3000K, 80 lumens per watt

minimum for CCT of 4100K, and 90 lumens per watt minimum for CCT of 5000K.

M. Internal driver, unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings.

N. In-line Fusing: On the primary for each luminaire.

O. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations.

P. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer.

Q. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of

luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

R. LED Driver/Power Supply:

1. Integral high efficiency driver with power supply of 120V-277V input at 60HZ.

2. Power factor greater than 0.9 at full load.

3. THD at < 20 percent.

4. Drive current at 1000 ma maximum.

5. Class 1 power supply.

6. Capable of being serviced from above or through the aperture.

7. Protected from overload and short circuit conditions.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and

support to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses.

D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing

and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion

lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

G. Housings:

1. Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in

use.

2. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Labels shall be

located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal

viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in

appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support

materials.

C. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and

designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff

complying with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat

wax.

3. Class I, Clear-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin;

Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear

coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin;

Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,

integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker),

complying with AAMA 611.

D. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual

for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating

finishes.


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil,

grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish

surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated

steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of

primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit

connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine walls, roofs, canopy ceilings and overhang ceilings for suitable conditions where

luminaires will be installed.


3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When

construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application

and approved by manufacturer.

C. Fasten luminaire to structural support.

D. Supports:



3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.


ONTARIO, OR.


4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls, attached to a minimum 1/8-inch backing plate


F. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.

G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

Install luminaires at height and aiming angle as indicated on Drawings.

H. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

I. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric

device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" and 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and

wiring methods.

3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In

concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied

with a 50 percent overlap.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION




A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after

electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270500 - 1

SECTION 270500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Communications equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for pathways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Common communications installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment:




installations.


4. So connecting pathways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of




C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communications items that are behind

finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with building type.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and pathway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.

Include type and number required for material and size of pathway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing

element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION








of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to

facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.



ONTARIO, OR.


3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate

concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor

or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable,

unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal pathway and cable

penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install steel pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for

1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve

seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable

material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve

seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against

pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications

installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.



ONTARIO, OR.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 1

SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Telecommunications mounting elements.

2. Backboards.

3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways.

4. Grounding.


1. Division 27 Section "TVCC Network Cabling Specification" for voice and data cabling

from the workstations to the voice/data room racks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.

B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

C. LAN: Local area network.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment

racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,

and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.



connection.

2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable

connections.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing

standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field

inspector.


A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installers, certified by the manufacturer, with at least 5

years experience installing and testing Category 5 cabling systems and Category 6 cabling

systems for 1 year in accordance with EIA/TIA 568 Standards.


by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until

spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above

ceilings is complete.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance

arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange

carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of

equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.

3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch

panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space

requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects,

and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and

security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

B. Coordinate installation of all equipment with Owner's IT representatives.

C. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications

equipment requiring electrical power to operate.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation

of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties

to brackets.

1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing

characteristics.

2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

4. Straps and other devices.

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for


1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches, 6 inches above finished

floor. If plywood is fire rated, ensure that fire-rating stamp is visible after installation.

1. Paint all sides of backboard with two coats of paint, leaving fire rating stamp visible.

2. Comply with requirements for backboard installation in BICSI's "Information

Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual" and TIA-569-D.

2.3 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4-inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32-inch holes

spaced 1-1/8 inches apart.

3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or

PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


ONTARIO, OR.


2.4 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Install underground pathways complying with recommendations in TIA/EIA-569-A, "Entrance

Facilities" Article.

B. Install underground entrance pathway complying with Division 26 Section "Raceways and

Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall

allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar

with a minimum No. 6 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable

electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor.

1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and

spaces.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply

with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Comply with

requirements in Division 09 Section "Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant

plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

B. See Division 27 Section "TVCC Network Cabling Specification" for additional identification

requirements. See Evaluations for discussion of TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section.

Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for

Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.



ONTARIO, OR.



Due to the competitive nature of this document, the information contained within is considered proprietary and confidential and shall not be copied, printed or otherwise reproduced without the express written permission of Northwest Nazarene University.

271200 - TVCC Network Cabling Specifications

Version

# Implemented Revision Approved Approval Reason

1 IT Department 1

Old Term(s) New Term

Entrance Facility. Entrance Room

Telecommunications Room, Equipment Room. Distributor Room

Telecommunications Room, Equipment Room. Telecommunications Space

Cross-connect, Patching System, Optical Enclosure. Distributor

Horizontal Cross-connect. Usually copper patch panels in enterprise installations. Distributor A

Intermediate Cross-connect, Intermediate Distribution Frame. Usually multimode

optical enclosure in enterprise installations. Can apply to intra and interbuilding

fiber cabling subsystems.

Distributor B

Main Cross-connect, Main Distribution Frame. Usually singlemode optical

enclosure in enterprise installations. Can apply to intra and interbuilding fiber

cabling subsystems.

Distributor C

Faceplate, Surface Box, Work Area Appliance. Equipment Outlet

Work Area. Equipment Outlet Location

Horizontal Cabling. Extends from Equipment Outlet to Distributor A, B, or C

depending on size of cable plant. Usually balanced twisted pair cable in enterprise

installations.

Cabling Subsystem 1

Extends from Distributor A to Distributor B or C, depending on size of cable plant.

Usually 50-micron intra-building backbone fiber cable in enterprise installations.

But may be singlemode fiber.

Cabling Subsystem 2

Connects Distributor A to Distributor B. In enterprise installations, this is usually

singlemode fiber between buildings.

Cabling Subsystem 3

Labeling Term Description

Element !Element" is the generic term for parts of a cabling system and associated infrastructure that

must be labeled. For instance, Telecommunications Spaces are elements.

Telecommunications Grounding Busbars are elements. Cabling Sub-system 1 (horizontal)

are elements.

Labeling Term Description

Component An infrastructure !component" is an individual device in the cabling system or associated

infrastructure that must be named and labeled with a unique identifier.

Identifier An !identifier" is the name given to an element that is used on labels, in records and reports.

Ideally an identifier should !encode" and incorporate information on the element location,

and its relationship to other spaces and elements in the system. An identifier may also be

referred to as the component#s name or !designator".

Records !Records" are collection of information about the system identifiers, how the system is laid

out, and may contain other information like link test results.

Telecommunications Space !Telecommunications Space" is the name for a room containing cabling patch systems.

Often referred to in documentation as a !TS" (telecommunications space) or !TR"

(telecommunications room).

Telecommunications Distributors !Distributor" is a copper or fiber optic patching devices. These are usually patch panels in

the case of copper. Optical patch fields usually have boxes or enclosures mounted behind

the patch field to contain slack.

Equipment Outets The term !Equipment Outlet" (EO) is synonymous with Work Area Outlet and is usually a

mounting appliance for connections, either faceplates or surface boxes.

Facility Class Description

General The ANSI/TIA 606-C labeling standard divides facilities into four !Classes" of dependent

upon size and complexity. This allows for the systematic listing of all components that

must be labeled in each size, or !Class" of facility.

Classes range from single floor, single telecom space installations, to multiple campuses

located in different cities.

Standards compliant labeling should ideally be able to scale as premises grow from

smaller class facilities to larger class facilities, without having to rework the naming and

labeling conventions originally put in place prior to growth.

The description for each Class include the components to be labeled, identifiers, and

records are listed below.

Class 1 Facilities Class 1 addresses the administration needs of a premise that is served by a single

telecommunications space (TS) containing its telecommunications equipment.

Required in Class 1 administration are identifiers for the TS, the telecommunications main

grounding busbar (TMGB), and all elements of the horizontal links.

For a copper horizontal link, the elements to be labeled include:

The connecting hardware (e.g., patch panel port or the section of a punchdown block

terminating a four-pair horizontal cable, or fiber patch fields in the case of fiber-to-the-

desk). A four-pair horizontal cable, or fiber horizontal cable.

A telecommunications outlet/connector terminating a four-pair horizontal cable or fiber

cable in the work area.

Facility Class Description

If a consolidation point (CP) is present, the elements to be labeled include:

The segment of four-pair horizontal cable extending from the TS to the CP connecting

hardware.

The CP connecting hardware or section of a punchdown block terminating a four-pair

horizontal cable.

The segment of four-pair horizontal cable extending from the CP connecting hardware

to the outlet/connector of a multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly (MUTOA) or to

the work area outlet.

If a MUTOA is present, the elements to be labeled include:

A telecommunications outlet/connector in the MUTOA.

For an optical fiber horizontal link, the elements include:

A pair of optical fiber terminations on a patch panel in the TS.

A pair of optical fibers in the fiber cable.

A pair of optical fiber terminations in the work area (equipment outlet).

A telecommunications outlet/connector terminating a pair of optical fibers in the work

area.

If a consolidation point (CP) is present, the elements to be labeled include:

The segment of optical fiber cable extending from the TS (telecommunications space)

to the CP connecting hardware.

The CP connecting hardware or section terminating a pair of optical fibers.

The segment of optical fiber cable extending from the CP connecting hardware to the

outlet/connector of a multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly (MUTOA) or to the

work area outlet.

Class 2 Facilities Class 2 administration provides for telecommunications infrastructure administration

needs of a single building or tenant that is served by a single or multiple TSs within a

single building.

Class 2 administration includes all elements of Class 1 administration, plus identifiers for:

Backbone cabling.

Multiple-element grounding and bonding systems.

Firestopping.

Class 3 Facilities Class 3 administration addresses the needs of a campus, including its buildings and

outside plant elements.

Class 3 administration includes all elements of Class 2 administration, plus:

Identifiers for buildings and interbuilding cabling.

Administration of pathways and spaces.

Outside plant elements.

Class 4 Facilities Class 4 administration addresses the needs of a multi-site system.

Class 4 administration includes all elements of class 3 administration, plus:

An identifier for each site.

Identifiers for wide area network connections.

Product Category Part Number Manufacturer Part Description

Copper Cabling

Products

PUP6AV04XX-G Copper Cable, Cat 6A, Vari-MaTriX, 4-Pair, 23

AWG, UTP, CMP, !XX" (color designator), OD

0.250, 1000ft/305m

PUR6AV04XX Riser version be added when released

CJ6X88TG** Category 6A, RJ45, 10 Gb/s, 8-position, 8-wire

universal module. Includes patented MaTriX split

foil tape. For colors, replace, !**", with !BL"

(Black), IW (Off White), with EI (Electric Ivory),

WH (White), AW (Arctic White), IG (International

Gray), OR (Orange), RD (Red), BU (Blue), GR

(Green), YL (Yellow), or VL (Violet).

FP6X88MTG TX6A, Category 6A UTP Field Term RJ45 Plug is

a simple-to-attach plug for field termination of 4-

pair unshielded twisted pair cable.

FPUD6X88MTG TX6A, Category 6A UTP Field Term RJ45 Plug

with 45 degree angle is is a simple-to-attach plug

for field termination of 4-pair unshielded twisted

pair cable.

DP246X88TGY 24 Port CAT6A 10Gb/s 1RU Patch Panel with 24

RJ45 8-position, 8-wire ports.

DP486X88TGY 48 Port CAT6A 10Gb/s 2RU Patch Panel with 48

RJ45 8-position, 8-wire ports.

CFPL2WHY Mini Com Classic series single gang vertical

faceplate accepts two Mini-Com® Modules,

includes label and label cover. White


faceplate accepts four Mini-Com® Modules,



faceplate accepts six Mini-Com® Modules,


CMBBL-X Mini-Com® 1-port blank module, reserves space

for future use. For other colors replace suffix BL

(Black) with IW (Off White), EI (Electric Ivory),

WH (White) or IG (International Gray). 10/PK


UTP28X*^ Category 6A Performance, 28AWG, UTP Patch

Cord, CM/LSZH, * = Length, ^ = Cord color Off

White (default; no designation needed),

BL=Black, BU=Blue, GR=Green, RD=Red,

OR=Orange, VL=Violet, YL=Yellow, GY=Gray

PUO6C04BL-U The copper cable is Category 6 outside plant

(OSP) U/UTP, 4-pair with conductors that are 23

AWG construction with polyolefin insulation. The

cable has a gel-filled construction to prevent

moisture migration in underground and wet

applications. Conductors are twisted in pairs,

separated by a pair separator, and covered by a

UV-resistant and abrasion-resistant polyethylene

(PE) jacket. It is for duct and conduit installations

only, it is not to be used in aerial or direct burial

applications. It is black and 1000' (305m) long.

PUR5525IG-UY Panduit or approved

equal

CAT5e cable 25pr riser rated $ Gray

P110KB1005Y Category 5e 110 Punchdown system kit includes

one 100-pair base with legs, twenty 5-pair

connecting blocks, two label and label holders

Fiber Cabling Products

FSPR924Y 24F OS2 Singlemode Interlocking Armored tight

buffered riser rated OFCR

FSLR924Y 24F OS2 Singlemode Interlocking Armored tight

buffered Indoor/Outdoor riser rated OFCR

FRME1U Opticom® Rack Mount Fiber Enclosure, 1RU,

holds up to 3 FAP or FMP adapter panels with

drawer that slides forward and backward

FLEX4U06 HD Flex® Fiber Enclosure, 4RU, holds up to 48

HD Flex Cassettes, Split front sliding drawers

FLEX-PLATE4U HD Flex Enclosure Trunk Slack Plate - 4 RU

FLEX-OPTI-1RU Opticom® bracket that holds 2 HD Flex Cassettes

FHS9N-12-10P HD Flex LC Splice Cassette preloaded with 12-

fiber OS2 pigtail and Standard IL, 6-port duplex

LC adapters in blue with zirconia sleeves

F92ERQ1Q1SNM001 2 fiber OS2 patch cord, LC push pull to LC push

pull, riser (OFNR) rated, 16mm jacket, Standard

IL 1 meter

Racks, Cabinets, and

Cable Management


R2P 19% EIA 2-post rack, aluminum. Dimensions:

84.0%H x 20.3%W x 3.0%D

R4P 19% EIA 2-post rack, steel, &12-24 threaded rails

Dimensions: 84.0%H x 23.3%W x 30.0%D

PR2VD08 PatchRunner+ 2 Vertical Cable Manager and

Doors, Dual Sided, 45RU, 83.9 H x 8.0 W x 20.7

D

Bonding and Grounding

ACG24K &6 AWG (16mm2) jumper for armored cable

diameter up to 0.84% (21.3mm); 24% (609.6mm)

length; factory terminated on one end with LCC6

two-hole copper compression lug and the other

end with grounding terminal; provided with two

each &12-24 and M6 thread-forming screws and a

black polypropylene terminal cover

LCC series Panduit two-hole compressing lugs for code

conductors in BICSI hole spacing

HTCT series Panduit HTAPs. Must be selected according

AWG size of run and tap conductors.

CLRCVR series Panduit clear covers for HTAPs. Must be selected

according to HTAP being covered

RGS134-1Y Grounding strip for newly installed racks or

cabinets with screw rails. 78.65% (2m) length; .67%

(17mm) width; .05% (1.27mm) thickness; provided

with .16 oz. (5cc) of antioxidant, one grounding

sticker and three each &12-24 x 1/2% and M6 x

12mm thread-forming screws

RGRB19Y Grounding busbar: 19" (483mm) length; tin-

plated; fourteen holes arranged for flexibility in

mounting; provided with two each &12-24x ½" and

M6 x 12mm thread-forming screws.

RGCBNJ660P22 Jumper kit for bonding individual racks or

cabinets into grounding backbone. &6 AWG

(16mm²) jumper; 60% (1.52m) length; 45° bent lug

on grounding strip side; provided with .16 oz.

(5cc) of antioxidant, two each &12-24 x 1/2%, M6 x

12mm, &10-32 x 1/2% and M5 x 12mm thread

forming screws and a copper compression HTAP*

for connecting to a &6 to &2 awg sized bonding

backbone


GJ672UH Rack jumper (and cabinet) kits for smaller TR (5

bays or less) to bond individual rack or cabinet

directly back to wall mounted busbar. One 72%

length &6 AWG green wire with yellow horizontal

stripe. Jumper is pre-terminated on one end with

LCC6-14JAWH-L and the other end with LCC6-

14JAW-L. This rack grounding jumper is 72% long.

For other lengths replace the %72% in the part

number. Available lengths are 72, 96, 120, 144, 168, 192, 216, 240, 264 and 288 inches

GB2B0306TPI-1 Wall mounted telecommunications busbar

suitable for small telecom room. Pre-assembled

with BICSI/TIA-607-B hole spacing. Bar is 1/4% x

2% x 12% in size


suitable for med telecom room. Pre-assembled

with BICSI/TIA-607-B hole spacing. Bar is 1/4% x

2% x 24% in size


suitable for main grounding busbar in medium

sized facility. Pre-assembled with BICSI/TIA-607-

B hole spacing. Bar is 1/4% x 4% x 20% in size

LTYK Wall mounted busbar tag. Kit includes printed tag

and one flame retardant cable tie

Cable Pathways

Wyr-Grid® For other widths and accessories click link to

Wyr-Grid® on Panduit website FRSP13--WW-

ENG

WG12BL10 12" W, Wyr-Grid Pathway, 118.4in x 12.5in x

2.1in, Black powder coated

FiberRunner ® FiberRunner ® 4X4 Guide on Panduit website

FRSP16<WW-ENG

FR4X4YL6 4 x 4 FiberRunner Channel

Network Labeling FOR INK JET/LASER PRINTER

PROG-EM2GO Easy-Mark Labeling Software for PC, supplied on

USB Flash Drive. For preprinting communications

labels on laser/inkjet printer

C195X040Y1J Faceplate labels Laser/ink jet component label,

1.95% W x 0.40% H, single-gang faceplate, non-

adhesive polyester, white, 1000 pc. package

quantity


C261X035Y1J Patch Panel labels for use with Easy-Mark

software and laser/ink jet printer

S100X650YAJ Cable label for indoor/outdoor tight-buffered

armored fiber optic cable. For use with Easy-Mark

software and ink jet printer.

S100X160YAJ Label fiber patch cords (jumpers). For use with

Easy-Mark software and ink jet printer. Use below

part for sleeve wrp on fiber patch cords

NWSLC-2Y-AQ Fiber cable identification sleeve in aqua is for up

to 2mm OD cable, 100 pc pk. Use to attached

above part label on

Other Cabling

Accessories

TTS-35RX0 .75" wide, continuous roll Hook and Loop Cable

Ties, black. 35 ft. roll. Carton qty 10 rolls

HLSP1.5S-X12 Plenum rated hook and loop cable ties for air

return spaces, Strip Style, 6" L x .75" W, Maroon

HLSP3S-X12 Plenum rated hook and loop cable ties for air

return spaces, Strip Style, 12" L x .75" W, Maroon


ONTARIO, OR.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280500 - 1

SECTION 280500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electronic safety and security equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.

3. Sleeve seals.

4. Grout.

5. Common electronic safety and security installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electronic safety and security equipment:




installations.


4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of




C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing

element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for

application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

INSTALLATION








ONTARIO, OR.



of both electronic safety and security equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such

a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the

vicinity.


3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PENETRATIONS

A. Electronic safety and security penetrations occur when raceways, pathways, cables, wireways,

or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall

assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed

openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies

unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor

or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 6 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,

unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve

and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable

penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel or cast-iron pipe

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


ONTARIO, OR.


M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow

for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical

sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable

material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve

seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against

pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electronic safety

and security installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.



ONTARIO, OR.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100 - 1

SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire alarm systems.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Electrical.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of smoke detectors; and

multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.

1. Provide new system with all necessary capabilities to perform detection and control

meeting all requirements of NFPA 72 and any local Jurisdictional requirements.


A. Comply with the latest NFPA 72, NFPA 70 (NEC), IBC/IFC/IMC and ADAAG.

B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Smoke detectors.

4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

5. Fire extinguishing system operation.

C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Audible and visual alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.

2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

5. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

6. Record events in the system memory.

7. Shutdown of all fans and air-handling equipment with duct detection serving the

building.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.

2. Activation of duct mounted smoke detector.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and

notification-appliance circuits.

2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.

4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.

6. A break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.

9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the FACP and remote annunciators.

2. Transmit trouble or supervisory signal to remote supervising station.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. Specific model numbers of pertinent equipment shall be highlighted for clarity on

datasheets containing information on multiple pieces of equipment.

2. Provide in portable document format (PDF).

B. Shop Drawings:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Shop Drawings are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be prepared by persons

with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.

b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level III or as required by the state the

Project is located in.

c. Factory authorized to represent the manufacturer and supply the submitted

manufacturer's equipment.

d. Provide documentation of preparers' qualifications (i.e. certificates of

qualification) and include in shop drawing submittal.

e. Contractor shall not copy original contract drawings and title blocks. Provide new

title block indicating contact information and qualifications for individuals and

firms responsible for providing and installing fire alarm equipment.

f. Shop drawings shall be developed utilizing a standard CAD program. Overlay of

new system layout to the original engineered plans in PDF format is unacceptable

and will be rejected.

2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of

operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually

and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard

descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

3. Device Address List and Input/Output Matrix: Coordinate with final system

programming.

4. Device backbox and other junction box requirements.

5. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and

sizes.

6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment

and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color

code.

7. Batteries: Size calculations based upon standard standby battery load calculations.

8. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each

detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity,

temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

9. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic,

amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device.

Show size and route of cable and conduits.

11. Shop drawing plans shall be developed utilizing a standard AutoCAD© or equivalent

software platform.

12. Contractor shall include specific, personalized title block and project specific

information. Contractor shall not "copy and paste" CTA provided documents into their

submittal.

13. All extraneous information included in documents provided by CTA shall be removed

from plans prior to the Contractor submitting working plans. Only pertinent, project

specific information shall be placed on submittal plans.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Qualification Data: Supplier.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


ONTARIO, OR.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's

manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.

G. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

submittals specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to

authorities having jurisdiction. This Submittal shall be reviewed and "approved" by the Project

Engineer prior to submitting to the AHJ and shall bear the project design firms Shop Drawing

stamp with signature and indication that the Submittal is approved. To facilitate review,

include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations.

Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of

comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review. Fire

Alarm Contractor shall provide professional stamping of Shop Drawings in jurisdictions where

it is required.

H. Documentation:

1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to

NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to

NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written

sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.

a. Hard copies on paper to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Work of this Section be performed by a UL-listed company.

C. Installer Qualifications: Personnel certified by NICET as Fire Alarm Level II.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

E. Supplier Qualifications: Factory authorized to represent, supply and perform service on the

manufacturer's product.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not

less than 1 unit.

2. Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than 1 unit.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Smoke and Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less

than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper proofed components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. FACP and Equipment:

a. Edwards Systems Technology Inc.

b. NOTIFIER by Honeywell.

c. Simplex by Johnson Controls Inc.

d. Siemens Building Technology

e. Silent Knight by Honeywell

f. Fire-Lite by Honeywell

2. Wire and Cable:

a. Comtran Corporation.

b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.

c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation.

d. West Penn Wire/CDT

e. Belden

f. Anixter

2.2 FACP

A. General Description:

1. Sized to accommodate indicated initiation and notification devices plus 20 percent.

2. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.

3. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for

adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity

range of the device.

4. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator

at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision.

Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control

menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of

smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.

a. System Layout: Install separate signaling line circuits per floor.

2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.

3. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for mechanical

equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided a break

in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical equipment to shut down.

D. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying with

ANSI S3.41.

E. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for

supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc

component shall be from the ac supply.

F. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and remote

annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates

an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.

2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances

until silencing switch is operated again.

3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,

notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

G. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating

devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP and

annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in

walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable

smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and control

of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled,

and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity

adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.


ONTARIO, OR.


I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and

supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator transmitter

and telephone lines.

J. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: A central emergency communication system with redundant

microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators integrated with the main FACP or

provided in a separate cabinet or and under the direct supervision and control of the FACP.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different

announcements to different zones, or for manual transmission of announcements by use

of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall be UL 1711 listed.

a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and,

at the same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any

combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.

c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."

d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of the type recommended by

NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of the notification-appliance

circuits of the FACP.

2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.

3. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones.

4. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup

units, on primary equipment failure.

K. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in

terminal unit.

1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes and

system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted password

algorithm.

L. Universal Serial Bus (USB) port.

1. The USB port shall allow for computer connection and communications necessary for

programming and downloading digital reports.

M. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.

Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal,

supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc

source.

1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the

power-supply module rating.

2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service

entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM

SYSTEM POWER."

N. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an

automatic transfer switch.


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Batteries: Rechargeable sealed-lead acid.

2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.

O. Surge Protection:

1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories.

2. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system

wiring external to the building housing the FACP.

P. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or

glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe

appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the

system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES

A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in

contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed

outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type.

With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

3. Indoor Protective Shield (IPS) (only where indicated on the Construction Documents):

Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to

initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn

intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield (WP) (only where indicated on the Construction

Documents): Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting

for access to initiate an alarm.

2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to the FACP.

3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted

in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection of building wiring.

4. Resetable from the fire alarm control panel.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-

on status.

6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and

individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.


ONTARIO, OR.


a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 15 or 20

deg F (8 or 11 deg C) per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be

settable at the FACP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg C).

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm)

smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011

percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.



4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted

in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for

mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to

building wiring.

a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied

detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.

5. Resetable from the fire alarm control panel.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-

on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and

individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General: UL 521 listed.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57

deg C) or rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute, unless



ONTARIO, OR.


1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.



C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C), unless otherwise indicated on Construction Documents.

1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.



2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system

connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured

10 feet (3 m) from the horn.

C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white

polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in

minimum 1 inch (25 mm) high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: Performance in accordance with ADA. Light distribution per UL

1971, Candela rating as called out on Drawings with ability to field adjust from 15

Candela to 115 Candela.

D. Voice/Tone Speakers:

1. UL 1480 listed.

2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.

3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1/4 to 2 W.

4. Mounting: Flush, semirecessed, or surface mounted; bidirectional as indicated.

5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to the acoustical environment of the speaker

location.

2.7 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is

connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush

mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the

indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where

the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also

designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.


ONTARIO, OR.


2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble

indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging,

silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls

with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for

alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for

listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open, dry contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing dry contact closure. Contacts shall be rated for minimum

2A current.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP,

and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote

central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The

unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2 lines, if service on either line is

interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a

signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining

line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central

station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.

C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is

adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.

D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.11 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION (WG)

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong,

or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of the device.

2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.


ONTARIO, OR.


2.12 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with

NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-

coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors, TFN/THHN

conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red

identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and

complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).

2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for

high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.

3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations

in NFPA 72.

B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with latest IMC, NFPA 72. Install sampling tubes so they

extend the full width of the duct.

D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler

water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing

position.

E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.

Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism

concealed behind a grille. Surface installations shall utilize surface box provided by the Fire

Alarm Supplier and Wiremold 700 raceway.

F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install in accordance with ADA and NFPA 72. Surface

installations shall utilize surface box provided by the Fire Alarm Supplier and Wiremold 700

raceway.

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.


ONTARIO, OR.


H. FACP: Semi-flush mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the

finished floor.

I. Annunciator: Install semi-flush with top of panel not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) above

the finished floor.


A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1.

2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceways

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system

shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any

other wire or cable.

2. Initiation Circuits: Class B; Notification Circuits: Class B.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the

same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and

back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.

Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with

the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring

diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type

terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or

equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm cable jackets differently from the normal building power

wiring. Use one color for alarm SLC circuit wiring and a different color for NAC and auxiliary

power (24vdc) circuits. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1 inch (25 mm) conduit between the FACP and

the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring

as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems."


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

D. Provide label on all fire alarm devices identifying address or circuit number.

E. Provide label indicating "End of Line Device" at all devices labeled as such on the shop

drawings.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from

main service grounding electrode system to the FACP.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.


1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the

form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.

Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct

supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at

Level III.

3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings

and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or

nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.

4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.

a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.

5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of

sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to

Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



ONTARIO, OR.




ONTARIO, OR

SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Building demolition excluding removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances.

B. Demolition of existing trees and other exiting site elements within the area planned for new

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fill Material: As specified on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCOPE

A. Remove & dispose of exiting asphalt, paving, concrete and curbing as required to accomplish

work.

B. Remove any other miscellaneous material from this site for a clean site to accept the new

construction.

3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent

structures and the public.

1. Obtain required permits.

2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of

unstable structures.

3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

4. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants.

5. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.

6. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

no obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from

removal operations.


ONTARIO, OR

SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2

7. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition

equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

B. Do not begin site clearing until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

C. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in

ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify the

Owner & Engineer; hazardous materials include but not limited to regulated asbestos

containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.

3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their

requirements; obtain required permits.

B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.

C. Do not disrupt utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.

D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7

days prior written notification to Owner.

E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at

least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.

F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification

of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades

if necessary.

G. Remove piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and

abandoned utilities.

3.4 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.



ONTARIO, OR

EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: preparation of sub-grade and

installation of strutural fill for buildings, walks, pavements, rough and finish grading.

B. Provide all related materials, equipment, and labor required to complete the Work as specified.


A. Common work Results for Utilities: Section 330500




1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Base: Compacted 3/4-inch minus crushed rock, underlying pavement, building slabs and

sidewalks.

B. Sub-Base: Compacted 3-inch minus pit-run, underlying Base.

C. Sub-Grade: Compacted native non-organic native material underlying Sub-Base.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 AGGREGATE FILL

A. Base: Well graded, clean, sound, durable particles of 3/4-inch minus, crushed rock or pit run

drain rock containing less than 10 percent passing the #200 sieve and shall meet ISPWC

specifications for 3/4 in. (Type I) Crushed Aggregate.

2.2 TOP SOIL

A. Friable loam, free of roots, rock larger than 1/2-inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds, and foreign

matter.


ONTARIO, OR


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, elevations, levels, contours, grades, and datum necessary to perform

earthwork operations as indicated on the drawings.

B. Examine Project Site with Owner and/or Engineer before the start of earthwork operations to

identify areas of adjacent property subject to rotation, slumping, or cave in. Prepare to brace or

shore areas to prevent dislocation of adjacent soil, pavement, utilities, structures, or other items

to remain.

C. Locate, identify, and protect existing utilities to remain that may be damaged by construction

operations.

1. Notify Engineer and Utility Company immediately of utilities not indicated on the

drawings.

2. Maintain all existing utilities in operating condition.

3. Repair any damage to utilities as directed by the Engineer or utility Owner.

D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or

displacement. Where markers are required to be removed, provide removal and reinstallation by

a licensed land surveyor, licensed in the State of Oregon, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 GRADING AND EXCAVATION

A. Provide dewatering, drainage, and ground water management to control moisture of soils when

performing grading operations during periods of wet weather.

B. Provide protection for workers within trench areas in accordance with local, State, and Federal

Occupational Safety and Health requirements/regulations.

C. All Fill Material for Building and Paving Areas shall be approved by the Owner and/or

Engineer.

3.3 FILL AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. The top twelve (12) inches of subgrade shall be scarified, moisture conditioned and re-

compacted to a minimum of ninety-five (95) percent maximum dry density.

B. Fill areas to the elevations indicated on the Drawings with approved material.

C. Place fill in eight (8) inch maximum lifts.

D. Compact each layer/lift to a minimum of ninety-five (95) percent maximum dry density.

E. Controlled fill shall not be constructed when the atmospheric temperature is below thirty-five

(35) degrees F. When the temperature falls below thirty-five (35) degrees F., it shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor to protect all areas of completed surface against any detrimental


ONTARIO, OR


effects of ground freezing by methods approved by the Engineer. Any areas that are damaged

by freezing shall be reconditioned, reshaped, and compacted by the Contractor if conformance

with the requirements of this specification without additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 SITE MAINTENANCE DURING GRADING AND EXCAVATION

A. Verify finished grades for conformance to the elevations indicated on the Drawings and for

specified conditions for subgrade.

B. Protect finish grade surfaces from excessive wheel loading during construction, including dump

trucks and concrete trucks.

C. Careful construction procedures are critical to the successful grading operation if the native

soils are wet and soft. Earthwork construction during winter and spring months often requires

special construction techniques that may affect timing. Consult the Engineer prior to initiating

wet weather construction.

D. Provide a finish grade surface after hard compaction, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade

and cross-section.

3.5 FINISH GRADING

A. Grade areas other than paved areas and building pad areas to finish grade elevations as

indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide finish grade areas uniform and smooth, free from large rocks, debris, or irregular

surface changes. Provide graded surfaces sloping uniformly between indicated elevations.

3.6 COMPACTION TESTS

A. Perform tests on each type of imported off-site material used for compacted fill.

B. Perform field density tests for in-place materials in accordance to one of the following

standards:

1. Sand-Cone Method: ASTM D 1556

2. Balloon Method: ASTM D 2167

3. Nuclear Method: ASTM D 2922 (Method B-Direct Transmission)

C. If tests indicate the Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace,

compact, and retest.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect building pad and building related earthwork from damage by construction operations

and erosion.

B. Prohibit vehicles from entering building pad area. Vehicles not permitted.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Scarify surface, reshape, and compact areas damaged by construction operations or weather

erosion.



ONTARIO, OR

ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Paving, surface treatments, and hot mix patching


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Requirements, Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The Asphalt Institute - Manual MS-4 - The Asphalt Handbook.

B. The' Asphalt Institute - Manual MS-13 - Asphalt Surface Treatments for Asphalt Penetration

Macadam.

C. ASTM D 692 - Specification for Course Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

D. ASTM D 946 - Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement

Construction.

E. ASTM D 1073 - Fine Aggregates for Bituminous Paving Mixtures,

F. ASTM D 3381 - Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement

Construction.

G. ASTM D 3515 - Specification for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

H. ISPWC - Section 800 - Aggregate/Asphalt Idaho, Standard Public Works Construction, current

edition.

I. LASTM D 1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures using 10 lbs (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18" (457 mm) Drop.

J. ISPWC Standard Drawings and Specifications, current edition.

1.4 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt patching.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Hot-mix asphalt paving.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for

aggregate pavement shoulders.

1.5 DEFINITION

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical

and performance properties.

1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job

mix proposed for the Work.

2. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

B. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless


1. Each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and Installer.

E. Material Certificates: For each paving `material, from manufacturer.

F. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A -paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction and the ISPWC and APWA Standards for Public Works

Construction Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot mix asphalt paving material

similar to that indicated for this project with.: a five-year record of successful in-service

performance:

B. Installer Qualifications: Asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained and

approved for installation of asphalt required far this Project. Engage an experienced installer

who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material similar to that indicated for this

project with a five-year record of successful in-service performance.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.


ONTARIO, OR


D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of ISPWC Standards for Public Works Construction,. Comply with ASTM D

3515.

E. Obtain materials from same source throughout


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively

damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following

conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.

2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.

3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910.

4. Asphalt Base Course:. Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of

placement.

5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.

6. Wind less than 10 per hour.

7. Do not place during rainfall, sand or dust storms, or before any imminent storms that

might damage the construction.

8. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 15 F degrees below bitumen.

supplier's bill of lading and not more than maximum specified temperature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous

installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured,

crushed blast-furnace slag.

C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared

from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total

aggregate mass.

D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other

inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP la, PG 58-28.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material ASTM D 946 for penetration

graded material.

C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-250.

D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime coat complying with ISPWC Standards for Public Work

Construction requirements.

E. Tack Coat ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or

AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade

and consistency for application.

F. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY-MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA Provide in granular,

liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Sand: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.

C. Paving. Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack,

rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.

D. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO M 324, hot-applied, single-component, polymer

modified bituminous sealant.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having

jurisdiction and designed according with ISPWC for class II Plant Mix Pavement.

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located.

2. Provide mixes complying with composition, grading, and tolerance requirements in

ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes:

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roil subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired, equipment to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15

tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as

directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation

beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired

flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section

to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent

sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove

excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat

concrete pieces firmly.

1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary,

crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.

2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal

patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement,. unless otherwise indicated. Cut

excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form

new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix

asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch

and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,

compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with

adjacent surfaces.

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface

course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.


ONTARIO, OR


1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of

1/4-inch.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4-inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4-inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material

from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply. Herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and

written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted -

aggregate base before applying paving materials.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.

yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place

asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of

mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.

2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.

3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.

4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated.

5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser

width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to

overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt

surface course.


ONTARIO, OR


C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to

remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent

segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct

joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix

asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.

2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.

3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.

4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes

work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered"

method according to Al MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving

Operations."

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will ,bear roller weight without excessive

displacement.

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density,

3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without

excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-

plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 degrees F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and

outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,

and smoothness. Correct lay down and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while

hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix

asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to

ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still

warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to

proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and

replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface

smoothness.


ONTARIO, OR


G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled

and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become

marked.

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the

following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2-inch.

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4-inch, no minus.

B. Pavement Surface. Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface. smoothness within

the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or

longitudinally to paved "areas:

1. Base course: 1/4-inch.

2. Surface Course: 1/8-inch.

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4-inch.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined

according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for

compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and

compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from

four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared

according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples

according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement,

with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear

method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM

D 2726.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.


ONTARIO, OR


F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

G. Protection: Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 2 days

or until surface temperature is less 'than 140 degrees F.

H. Special Testing: The contractor shall flood test the finished asphalt surface to identify potential

areas for correction. The contractor shall notify the Project Manager and Landscape Architect

for review of the flood testing. Areas that do not drain and pool water deeper than the depth of a

nickel shall be identified and corrected as required.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and

legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove excess base rock from edges of asphalt.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Exterior cement concrete for walk ways, ramps, pads, valley gutter, and curbs.

B. Provide all related materials, equipment and labor required to complete the Work as specified.


A. Site Clearing: Section 311000

B. Earth Moving: Section 312000

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated on the Drawings.

B. Mix Designs: for Each concrete mix, include alternate mix designs when characteristics of

materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Reinforcing Steel: Show all locations of concrete steel reinforcement with all bends, type of

placement methods, amounts, lengths etc. for all installation.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items

compiles with requirements.

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates

2. Steel reinforcement and accessories

3. admixtures

4. curing materials

5. Floor and slab treatments

6. Bonding agents

7. Adhesives

8. Joint filler strips


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Authorities

Having Jurisdictions, Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the

testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM 548.

B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated.


ONTARIO, OR


1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

2. ACI 117. "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type

materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. Provide

appropriate form liner material to shape the reveal patterns indicated on the Drawings.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

C. Form Ties - Superior wood con "Snap ties" or equal.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing and Tie Bars: ASTM A615/A, Grade 60; deformed.

B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A82, as drawn.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A615/A, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends

square and free of burrs.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports

according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete

of greater compressive strength than concrete.

E. Slip Dowel Sleeves: Proprietary plastic sleeve consisting of a polypropylene plastic sleeve and

a reusable base. Greenstreak, 'Speed Dowel,' or equal.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type,

brand, and source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II or I/Il, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

b. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M coarse aggregate, uniformly graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: Not exceeding 3/4-inch nominal.


ONTARIO, OR


2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement, when

tested in accordance with ASTM C 1260.

C. Water: ASTM C 94.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified

by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1

percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. High Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion Joint Filler Strips: ASTM D 3575, 1/2-inch closed-cell polyurethane foam backing,

with removable joint cap, Sonneborn Sonolastic Expansion Joint Filler, or approved equal.

B. Joint Primer: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. Solvent based primer for preparing

concrete surfaces for adhesion to sealant. Sonneborn Sonolastic Primer 733, or approved equal.

C. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. Non-priming, single-component,

polyurethane sealant, Sonneborn Sonolastic SL1, or approved equal. Color to be selected by

Owner's Representative from Sonneborn's Full color palette.

D. Backer Rod: Non-gassing, reticulated closed-cell polyethylene rod designed for use with cold-

applied joint sealants where joint depth exceeds manufacturer's recommended depth for joint

sealant. Comply with ASTM C 1330, Type C. Size as required for joint design. Sonneborn

Sonolastic Closed-Cell Backer Rod, or approved equal.

E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

F. Curing Compounds for Non-Colored Cement Concrete: Clear, ASTM C 309, nonstaining.

2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of

normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete

mixture designs for the trial batch method.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi minimum for sidewalks, valley gutter and

curbing.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 to 4-1/2 inches without Water-Reducing Admixtures; 5 inches with

Water- Reducing Admixtures.


ONTARIO, OR


a. Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture:

When a high-range water-reducing admixture is used, the maximum limit may be

increased an additional two (2) inches.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of

placement having an air content of 4 to 6 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of

cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture and/or high-range, water-reducing admixture in concrete,

as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

Portland Cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolans: 25 percent.

2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.

3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent,

with fly ash or Pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 degrees

Fahrenheit, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, and mix concrete materials

and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch

machine mixer.

1. For concrete mixes of one (1) cubic yard or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2

minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of

batch is released.

2. For concrete mixes larger than one (1) cubic yard, increase mixing time by 15 seconds for

each additional cubic yard.

C. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water

added.


ONTARIO, OR


2.7 FREEZE THAW SEALER

A. Freeze Thaw Protection Sealer: Water-based liquid containing sodium that chemically reacts

with the concrete calcium compounds.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Sinak S-102

2. Chem-Trete, Sivento

3. Enviroseal 20, Hydro 20

4. Okon W-2, Okon Inc.

C. Extent of Work: Provide over all exterior surfaces of concrete walks, patios, islands, pads, and

curbs to prevent freeze-thaw damage to concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and sub-base surfaces for compliance with requirements for

dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proceed with concrete placement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared sub-base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional

compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected

and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

B. Remove loose material from compacted sub-base surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Formwork: Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI

301.

B. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to

required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so

forms can remain in place at least twenty-four (24) hours after concrete placement.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete

without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT


ONTARIO, OR


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during

concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as feasible. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous

laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as feasible. Handle units to keep them flat and free

of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required

before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with

faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to

centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at

locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than 1/2-hour unless pavement

terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Doweled Expansion Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at expansion joints

in concrete paving indicated as "Vehicular Concrete Paving" on the Drawings. Lubricate,

asphalt-coat, or provide proprietary plastic sleeve per manufacturer's directions, on one-

half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars where new concrete paving meets existing concrete

paving. Drill and epoxy one-half of bar into existing paving. Lubricate, asphalt-coat, or

provide proprietary plastic sleeve per manufacturer's directions, on the half of dowel

length embedded in new concrete to prevent concrete bonding to that side of joint.

C. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as

indicated on the Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least ¼ of the

concrete thickness, at intervals of ten (10) feet maximum, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings, and as follows:

1. Score Joints: Form score joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge

of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of score joints after

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. Remove

"shiner" bands.

D. Joints in Curbs and Gutters: Space contraction joints in curbs and gutters at maximum 10-foot

intervals with isolation joints at maximum 30-foot intervals or as shown on the Drawings.

Isolation joints shall be struck vertically and full depth. Align joints in concrete curbs with

joints in finish paving.


ONTARIO, OR


E. Edging: Tool exposed edges of ramps, sidewalks, walkways and joints in concrete after initial

floating with an edging tool to a 1/2-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface

finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel

reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in-place. Notify other trades to permit

installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from sub-base surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.

Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten sub-base to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not

place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation

and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push

or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented

by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an

internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms.

Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with

care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

I. Place concrete pavement in two (2) operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of

placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated

bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.

1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than fifteen (15) minutes

without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Owner's

Representative.

J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using

bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess

moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before

beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

K. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,

submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce

curbs and gutters to required cross sections, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for


ONTARIO, OR


formed concrete. If results are not approved by Owner's Representative, remove and replace

with formed concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.

L. When adjoining concrete pavements are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on

concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below forty (40) degrees

Fahrenheit, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete

mixture temperature of not less than fifty (50) degrees Fahrenheit and not more than

eighty (80) degrees Fahrenheit at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

N. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions

exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below ninety (90)

degrees Fahrenheit at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be

used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount

of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed

ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations

is prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and

the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-

driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces

to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform

granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Light-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished

concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq.-ft. x h before and during finishing

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing

compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days with

the following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at

least twelve (12) inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair

any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACl 117 for driveways, roadways, ramps, sidewalks, walkways, and

as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4-inch.

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8-inch, minus 1/4-inch.

3. Surface; Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 114 inches.

4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.

5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4-inch.

6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2-inch.

7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length

of dowel 114 inches per 12 inches.

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.

9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4-inch, no minus.

10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8-inch, no minus.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply

with requirements in this Section at no additional cost to the Owner.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Drill test cores, where directed by Owner's Representative, when necessary to determine

magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory concrete areas with

Portland cement concrete bonded with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least fourteen (14) days

after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible

by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.

Sweep concrete pavement not more than two (2) days before date scheduled for Substantial

Completion inspections.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Remove all excess material, debris, and equipment from site upon Completion of Work in this

Section. Keep work area clean and in an orderly condition during the course of the Work.

B. Do not dispose of waste concrete or wash out materials on the site unless otherwise directed by

the Owner's Representative. Areas to be paved may be acceptable for concrete truck wash areas

only as approved by the Owner's Representative.



ONTARIO, OR

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1

SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Painted markings applied to asphalt or concrete pavement


A. Asphalt Paving: Section 321216




1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit drawings of parking lot layout for approval prior start work

C. Material Source: Submit product certification that product meet specifications.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken

and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of

manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry", protected location within temperature range

required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITION

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a

minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 degrees F for oil-based materials 55 deg F for

water based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.


ONTARIO, OR

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 2

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement-Marking Paint shall comply with ISPWC Specifications.

1. Color: White Yellow Blue As indicated on plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified

with Engineer.

B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting* pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions

indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide

a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.



ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1

SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping.

2. Manual valves.

3. Automatic control valves.

4. Transition fittings.

5. Sprinklers.

6. Quick couplers.

7. Drip irrigation specialties.

8. Controllers.

9. Boxes for automatic control valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves.

Piping is under pressure during flow.

B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

C. ET Controllers: Evapo-Transpiration Controllers. Irrigation controllers which use some method

of weather based adjustment of irrigation. These adjusting methods include use of historical

monthly averages of ET; broadcasting of ET measurements; or use of on-site sensors to track

ET.

D. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and

including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

E. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control

valves.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor

adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.

C. Delegated Design: Design 100 percent coverage irrigation system, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and

design criteria indicated.

1. Available land records indicate the following soil conditions:

a. Type: Medium.

b. Texture:

1) Sand: 65 percent.

2) Silt: 20 percent.

3) Clay: 15 percent.

c. Particle Size:

1) Sand: 0.6 to 0.2 mm.

2) Silt: 0.075 to 0.005 mm.

3) Clay: <0.005 mm.

d. Structure: Granular.

e. Moisture Content: 32 percent.

f. Infiltration Rate: 6-8" per hr.

D. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping,

valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig.

2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For irrigation systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. Also include

adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.

D. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers controllers and automatic control valves to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spray Sprinklers: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and size

indicated, but no fewer than 2 units.

2. Bubblers: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer

than 2 units.

3. Drip-Tube System Tubing (In-Line Emitters): Equal to 10 percent of total length installed

for each type and size indicated, but not less than 100 feet.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers that include a certified irrigation designer

qualified by The Irrigation Association.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by



A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting

materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. PE Pipe with Controlled OD: ASTM F771, PE 3408 compound, SDR 11.

1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D3261.

2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D2683.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedules 40 and 80.

2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80.

3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and

tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to

ASTM F656.

2.3 MANUAL VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves:



the following:

a. American Valve, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.

b. Class: 125.

c. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

d. Body Material: ASTM B62 bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

e. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

f. Stem: Bronze, non-rising.

g. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

h. Packing: Asbestos free.


ONTARIO, OR.


i. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves:



the following:

a. Hunter Industries Incorporated.

b. Netafim USA.

c. Rain Bird Corporation.

2. Description: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow

adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends

compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Transition Couplings:



the following:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Dresser, Inc.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

d. JCM Industries, Inc.

e. Smith-Blair, Inc.

f. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:



the following:

a. Harvel Plastics, Inc.

b. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-socket end.


ONTARIO, OR.


D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:



the following:

a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include one brass or stainless-steel

threaded end, one solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union

nut.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized

cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F.

B. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch- diameter dial, dial range of two times system

operating pressure, and bottom outlet.

2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at

available water pressure.

B. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:



the following:


b. Rain Bird Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS.

b. Nozzle: ABS.

c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel.

d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.

3. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Flow: Varies.

b. Pop-up Height: 4 inches aboveground to nozzle.

c. Arc: Full Half Quarter circle.

d. Radius: Varies.


ONTARIO, OR.


e. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.

C. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:



the following:


b. Rain Bird Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS.

b. Nozzle: ABS.

c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel.

d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.

e. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.


a. Nozzle: ABS.

b. Flow: Varies - match precipitation rate.

c. Pop-up Height: 4 inches aboveground to nozzle.

d. Arc: Full Half Quarter circle.

e. Radius: Varies.

f. Inlet: NPS 1/2.

2.8 BUBBLERS

A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage full circle discharge at available water

pressure.

B. Adjustable Flood Bubbler:



the following:


2. Description:

a. Body Material: Corrosion UV-resistant plastic.

b. Internal Parts: Integral elastomeric flow bushing for maintaining a constant flow

rate.

c. Compatibility: With a plastic filter screen to protect the nozzle from debris in the

water and a stainless steel adjustment screw that can be used to regulate the flow



ONTARIO, OR.


a. Operating Pressure Range: 20 to 90 PSI.

b. Maximum Flow: 2 GPM

c. Radius: Full.

d. Inlet: 1/2-inch Female National Pipe Thread (FNPT) inlet for connection to a 1/2-

inch male threaded riser

2.9 QUICK COUPLERS



1. Hunter Industries Incorporated.

2. Rain Bird Corporation.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-

seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose

swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key.

1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include two matching key(s).

2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES



1. Netafim USA.

B. In-Line Emitter Drip Line Tubes:

1. Tubing: Flexible PE with plugged end.

2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control.

b. Mounting: Integral (manufacturer installed) into tubing at set intervals

c. Emitters: Pressure compensating and continuously self-cleaning, with integral

check valve and built-in physical root barrier.


a. Tubing Size: NPS 0.66-inch OD.

b. Length: Varies.

c. Emitter Spacing: 18 inches.

d. Emitter Flow: 0.9 gph.

C. Plastic, Automatic Drip Zone Control Kits

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:


ONTARIO, OR.



2. Description: All-in-one, pre-assembled kit with automatic zone valve, filter and pressure

regulator.

a. Automatic Zone Valve: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type

with manual-flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.

b. Filter: Diaphragm 150 mesh stainless steel filter screen with flush cap.

c. Pressure Regulator: 25 or 40 psi.

D. Manual Line Flushing Valve:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Netafim USA

E. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4, with corrosion-resistant

internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig.

F. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity

required for devices downstream from unit.

G. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

2.11 CONTROLLERS

1. As indicated on drawings

B. Description:

1. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from

approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each

station.

2. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, dripproof, with locking cover and two

matching keys.

a. Body Material: Molded plastic.

b. Mounting: Surface type for wall.

3. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse.

4. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations to skip

operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate two or more

times daily.

a. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset

automatic operation.

b. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing

device during power outages.

c. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power.


ONTARIO, OR.


5. Moisture Sensor: Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water flow during rain.

6. Smart Controllers: Use ET, tested in accordance with IA SWAT Climatological Based

Controllers 8th Draft Testing Protocol and compliant with ASHRAE Standard 189.1.

7. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors; insulated cable;

suitable for direct burial.

a. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers.

b. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers

and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable

jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same

trench.

c. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-

type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct

burial.

C. Weather Sensor:

1. As indicated on Drawings.

2. Description: Calculates evapotranspiration (ET) and adjusts controller zone setting time

daily based on local weather conditions

a. Measures sunlight and temperature, and uses ET to determine the correct seasonal

adjustment percentage value to send to the controller.

b. Receives from controller seasonal adjustment value to modify the actual irrigation

run time for that day

3. Rain and freeze shutoff.

2.12 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic Boxes:



the following:

a. Carson Industries LLC.

b. Oldcastle, Inc.

2. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for

installing flush with grade.

a. Size: As required for valves and service.

b. Shape: Square and Rectangular.

c. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.

d. Cover Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.

1) Lettering: "IRRIGATION."


ONTARIO, OR.


B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4-inch minimum to 3 inches

maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6

inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone,

graded from 3/4 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet

of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material.

D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade

2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches.

3. Drain Piping: 12 inches.

4. Sleeves: 24 inches.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval before

excavation.


A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems.

Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or

smaller pipe connection.

G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2

or larger pipe connection.

H. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping.


ONTARIO, OR.


I. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

J. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at

least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing.

K. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet.

Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

L. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.

M. Install sleeves made of Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

N. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following:

1. Underground Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA transition couplings.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut







D. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or

paper towels. Join according to ASTM D2657.

1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

E. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D2855.

3. PVC Non-pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855.


ONTARIO, OR.



A. Underground Curb Valves: Install in curb-valve casings with tops flush with grade.

B. Throttling Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

C. Drain Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

D. Air Relief Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed.

B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights.

C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2

inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated.

D. Sprinklers are not to spray through fences.

3.7 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install in-line emitter drip tubes as indicated on drawings on ground, under mulch, or subsurface

B. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and in control-valve boxes.

3.8 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install interior controllers on wall.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches below or beside

piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer.

Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas.

C. Weather Sensor

1. Install weather sensor at all weather exposed location on roof top, unobtrusive to patio

activity.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution"

for water supply from exterior water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and

backflow preventers. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components.

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and

signs on each automatic controller.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator

of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of

hazards and improper operations.

C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes

over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for

warning tapes.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:



2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and

automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation.


equipment.

D. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



ONTARIO, OR.


3.12 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.


2. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal.

3.13 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust settings of controllers.

B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for

each sprinkler circuit.

C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will

be flush with, or not more than 1/2-inch above, finish grade.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves.


A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of

joints indicated.

C. Underground irrigation main piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Schedule 80, PVC pipe; Schedule 80, threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints.

D. Underground irrigation main piping, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. PE pressure pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion fittings; and heat-fusion joints.

2. Schedule 40 or Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

E. Circuit piping (lateral), NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. DR 11, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion, or PE socket-type fittings; and heat-

fusion joints.

2. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.


ONTARIO, OR.


F. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded

PVC fittings; and threaded joints.

1. Option: Plastic swing-joint assemblies, with offsets for flexible joints, manufactured for

this application.

G. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings;

and solvent-cemented joints.

H. Drain piping shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Underground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: Use the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Curb valve, curb-valve casing, and shutoff rod.

B. Throttling-Duty Valves:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic automatic control valve.

C. Drain Valves:

1. NPS 1 to NPS 2: Bronze gate valve.



ONTARIO, OR.

SOIL PREPARATION 329113 - 1

SECTION 329113 - SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils and layered soil assemblies specified by composition of the

mixes.


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

2. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses.

3. Section 329300 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be

amended or un-amended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic

material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it

is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly

decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other that together

produce an environment for plant growth.

H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments,

and other materials to produce planting soil.

I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-,

and water-testing laboratories through inter-laboratory sample exchanges and statistical

evaluation of analytical data.


ONTARIO, OR.


J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of un-decayed plant and animal

tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil

organic matter."

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for

plant growth.

L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and

Recovery Act.

M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.

N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top

surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally

occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas,

surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the

surface soil can be subsoil.

Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Include recommendations for application and use.

2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.

4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer

before delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products.

b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO

methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25.

c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according

to SSSA methods, where applicable.

B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 1-quart volume of each in sealed containers labeled

with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be

furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture.


ONTARIO, OR.



A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction soil analyses specified in "Preconstruction

Testing" Article.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated

laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1. Laboratories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide testing by approved

testing agency:

2. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified

testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

soil analyses on existing, on-site soil imported soil.

B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each un-amended soil type, perform testing on soil samples

and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer

recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-

Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.

1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample

collection and labeling requirements.

1.9 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor under the

direction of the testing agency.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil samples from

varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: As directed by testing agency.

3. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location

system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.


ONTARIO, OR.


1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:

1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods

according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical

Methods":

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse,

medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for

fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.

2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's

"Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and

Mineralogical Methods."

4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis -

Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85 percent compaction according to

ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil

Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using

CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis -

Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals

including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium,

and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective

action.

4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including

aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium,

mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc.

D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of

SSSA NAPT WERA-103, including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter.

2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.

3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).

4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.

5. Nitrogen ppm.

6. Phosphorous ppm.

7. Potassium ppm.

8. Manganese ppm.

9. Manganese-availability ppm.

10. Zinc ppm.


ONTARIO, OR.


11. Zinc availability ppm.

12. Copper ppm.

13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio.

14. Soluble-salts ppm.

15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the

Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional

recommendations for corrective action.

16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods

of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil

amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable

plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and

potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft.

for 6-inch depth of soil.

G. If placing and mixing planting soil over exposed subgrade testing to be performed after mixture

is completed.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and

Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,

or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,

water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.

4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate

certificates.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.2 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION

A. General: Soil amendments, fertilizers, and rates of application specified in this article are

guidelines that may need revision based on testing laboratory's recommendations after

preconstruction soil analyses are performed.

B. Planting-Soil Type 'Turf ': Existing, on-site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained; and

stockpiled on-site; modified to produce viable planting soil. Blend existing, on-site surface soil

with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce

planting soil:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: 1:3 by volume.

2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: Weight as recommended by soil testing agency per

1000 sq ft. per 6 inches of soil depth.

3. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: Weight as recommended by soil testing agency per


C. Planting-Soil Type 'Planter': Existing, on-site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any,

retained; and stockpiled on-site; modified to produce viable planting soil. Blend existing, on-site

surface soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to

produce planting soil:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: 1:3 by volume.

2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: Weight as recommended by soil testing agency per


3. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: Weight as recommended by soil testing agency per


D. Planting-Soil Type 'Imported': Imported, naturally formed soil from off-site sources and

consisting of sandy loam soil according to USDA textures; and modified to produce viable

planting soil.

1. Sources: Take imported, unamended soil from sources that are naturally well-drained

sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep, not from agricultural land, bogs, or

marshes; and that do not contain undesirable organisms; disease-causing plant pathogens;

or obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass,

Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass,

wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass.

2. Additional Properties of Imported Soil before Amending: Soil reaction of pH 6 to 7 and

minimum of 6 percent organic-matter content, friable, and with sufficient structure to

give good tilth and aeration.

3. Unacceptable Properties: Clean soil of the following:

a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement,

plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar,


ONTARIO, OR.


roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant

growth.

b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse

sand that exceed a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of the imported

soil.

c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand

exceeding 2 inches in any dimension.

4. Amended Soil Composition: Blend imported, unamended soil with the following soil

amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: 1:3 by volume.

a. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: Weight as recommended by soil testing agency

per 1000 sq. ft. per 6 inches of soil depth.

b. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: Weight as recommended by soil testing agency

per 1000 sq. ft. per 6 inches of soil depth.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting

feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:

1. Feedstock: Limited to leaves.

2. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8.

3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m.

4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight.

5. Organic-Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.

6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 1-inch sieve.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available

phosphoric acid.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified testing agency.

C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified testing agency.

D. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial-

grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots.


ONTARIO, OR.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete

slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,

turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING

A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 6 inches and stockpile until

amended.

B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement,

plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing

compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones,

roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand.

D. Screening: Pass un-amended soil through a 2-inch sieve to remove large materials.

3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix un-amended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting

soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively

wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches. Remove stones larger than

1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally

dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of un-amended

soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing" Paragraph below. Mix

thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

C. Mixing: Spread un-amended soil to total depth of 8 inches, but not less than required to meet

finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or

subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and

thoroughly blend them with un-amended soil to produce planting soil.

a. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.


ONTARIO, OR.


2. Lifts: Apply and mix un-amended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in

loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 4

inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum

Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D698 and tested in-place.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.4 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply materials

or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches. Remove stones larger than

2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally

dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply approximately half the thickness of planting soil over prepared, loosened

subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting

soil.

C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth of 8 inches, but not less than required to meet

finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or

excessively wet.

1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose depth for material

compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard

Proctor density according to ASTM D698.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination.

Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting

operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Vehicle traffic.

4. Foot traffic.

5. Erection of sheds or structures.

6. Impoundment of water.


ONTARIO, OR.


7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

B. If planting soil or subgrade is over compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or

deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the

subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination.

Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash,

and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.



ONTARIO, OR.

TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sodding.


1. Section 329300 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as

border edgings and mow strips.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and

molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant.

C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation" and drawing designations for planting soils.

E. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top


1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


ONTARIO, OR.



A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed mono-stand or mixture,

stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and

percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of

packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turf grass sod. Include identification of source and

name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.

D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to

Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of

turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful

turf establishment.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the

National Association of Landscape Professionals or American Hort.

2. Experience: Three years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened

containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication

of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for

Turf grass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turf grass Sod Transplanting and Installation"

sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turf grass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours

of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

C. Bulk Materials:


ONTARIO, OR.




2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,


3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods

with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial

Completion.

1. Spring Planting: March 1 to April 30.

2. Fall Planting: September 1 through first freeze.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be

obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turf grass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turf grass Sod Materials" in

TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turf grass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density,

color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when

planted.

B. Turf grass Species, Cool-Season Grass: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 85

percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed

seed:

1. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis).

b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety).

c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne).

d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:


ONTARIO, OR.


1. Composition:

a. Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports

from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition:

a. Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports

from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-

growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH

range of 4.5 to 6.5.

B. Non-asphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for

slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

2.4 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as

required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination

or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth

that has already germinated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting

installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within

a planting area.

2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture

content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.


ONTARIO, OR.


3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting

area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting

soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and

plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydro-seeding and hydro-mulching overspray.

2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to

Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

B. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in place over exposed subgrade Blend

planting soil in place.

1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry

before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded

or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or

muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch

or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil

or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air

pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between

pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3.

2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod

manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.


ONTARIO, OR.


C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after

planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth

of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.5 TURF RENOVATION

A. Renovate existing turf where indicated.

B. Renovate turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment

and movement of vehicles.

1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is

required.

2. Install new planting soil as required.

C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.

D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials, such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel,

and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new

planting soil.

E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.

F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as

required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.

G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf,

and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.

I. Apply initial fertilizer required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of

existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

1. Initial Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer applied according to manufacturer's

recommendations.

J. Apply sod as required for new turf.

K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.

3.6 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,

replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll,

regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf.

Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.


ONTARIO, OR.


2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new

mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.

Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of

pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey

water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or

mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly

planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall

precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified

height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of

grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades

bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent

mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow Kentucky bluegrass to a height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches.

D. Turf Post fertilization: Apply commercial fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.

3.7 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand

of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage

exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-

colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and

surface irregularities.

3. Satisfactory Plugged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs

has been established as well-rooted, viable patches of grass, and areas between plugs are

free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.

4. Satisfactory Sprigged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs

has been established as well-rooted, viable plants, and areas between sprigs are free of

weeds and other undesirable vegetation.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue

maintenance until turf is satisfactory.


ONTARIO, OR.


3.8 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.

Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify

Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat

already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of

vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted

areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and

remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove non-degradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.


A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape

Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately

after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than

the following periods:

1. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.



ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 1

SECTION 329300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plants.

2. Tree stabilization.

3. Tree-watering devices.

4. Landscape edgings.


1. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydro-seeding,

and erosion-control materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were

grown, with a ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type

and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with

twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown

and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended

by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting

or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than the minimum

root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a

well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when

removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root

mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

F. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-

ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 2

Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type

and size of plant.

G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

H. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and

molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

I. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

J. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation" for drawing designations for planting soils.

L. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs,

vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

M. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the

stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the

stem or trunk.

N. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

O. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top


1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades

are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas,

and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.



1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Organic Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags

labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 3

Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate

representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

2. Mineral Mulch: 2 lb of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with

source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and

installed on-site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the

material.

3. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches.

4. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected.


A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by

Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses,

and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying

with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods

established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to

Project.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of

plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful

establishment of plants.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the

National Association of Landscape Professionals or American Hort.

2. Experience: Three years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements

in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable

requirements in ANSI Z60.1.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 4

C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position.

Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and

container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not

measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root

flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at

site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size,

and quality. Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls

and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject

unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees

or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to

site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with

state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:



2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,


3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from

sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not

bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide

protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery

and handling.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball.

E. Apply anti-desiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over

trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging,

handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery

before moving and again two weeks after planting.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 5

F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to

protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.

G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If

planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate

aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep

roots moist.

1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other

acceptable material.

2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.

Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet

condition.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation

system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new

plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods

with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Spring Planting: April 15 through July 1.

2. Fall Planting: September 1 through first frost.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be

obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's

written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in

materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.


a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of

adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.

c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization and edgings.

d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 6

b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the

succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at

end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for

replaced plant material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,

shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated

on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by

transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock,

densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots,

sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is

squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing

trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4-inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are

unacceptable.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an

established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types

and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a

proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which

begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached,

waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including

genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the

plant.

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for

uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 7

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade

planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting

nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 10-gram tablets.

2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and

shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Wood and bark chips.

2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2-inch minimum.

3. Color: Natural.

B. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign

substances, of the following type, size range, and color:

1. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone.

2. Size Range: 3/4-inch maximum, 1/4-inch minimum.

3. Color: Match existing on site.

2.4 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum,

composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position.

Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals,

alkalis, and acids.

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as

required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination

or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth

that has already germinated.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 8

2.6 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with

loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.



the following:

a. Border Concepts, Inc.

b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc.

c. J. D. Russell Company (The).

d. Sure-loc Edging Corporation.

2. Edging Size: 1/4-inch thick by 5 inches deep 1/4-inch thick by 4 inches deep.

3. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 15 inches long.

4. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers.

5. Finish: Unfinished.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Anti-desiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees

and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to


B. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

C. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D448

for Size No. 8.

D. Planter Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made

of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and

conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within

a planting area.

2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with

adequate overhead clearance.

3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture

content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 9

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.

B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting

area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting

soil.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing

plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations,

outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout

before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs

and outline areas for multiple plantings.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to

Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

B. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in-place over exposed subgrade.

C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded

or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with

vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom

raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further

disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling.

Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped

stock.

3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate

vertical roots for bare-root stock.

4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 10

5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level

and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate

subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing

improvements.

7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.

8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's

personnel.

9. If drain tile is indicated on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of

porous backfill over tile.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill soil

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs

are encountered in excavations.

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or

to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention

in tree or shrub planting pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to

ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to

where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare,

verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly;

do not break.

C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with

root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.

2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove

burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove

from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if

root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before

placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is

approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root

tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 11

a. Quantity: Three for each caliper inch of plant.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root

flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.

2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before

placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is

approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root

tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. Quantity: Two per plant.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

E. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with

the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above

the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.6 MECHANIZED TREE-SPADE PLANTING

A. Trees may be planted with an approved mechanized tree spade at the designated locations. Do

not use tree spade to move trees larger than the maximum size allowed for a similar field-

grown, balled-and-burlapped root-ball diameter according to ANSI Z60.1, or larger than

manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for the tree spade being used, whichever is

smaller.

B. Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as will be used to extract and transport the

tree.

C. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball

of earth.

D. Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations.

E. Plant trees following procedures in "Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting" Article.

F. Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location.

3.7 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 12

C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural

and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders;

remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural

character.

D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.8 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless


1. Upright Staking and Tying:

a. Stake trees with two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in

caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper.

Space stakes equally around trees.

2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough

slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

3.9 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on

Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil planter for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs the

root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around

plants to hold water.

F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery

from transplanting shock.

3.10 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure

seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 13

1. Trees and Treelike Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch average

thickness, with 36-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3

inches of trunks or stems.

2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch as

indicated on drawings, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch

within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of mineral mulch as

indicated on drawing, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch

within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF EDGING

A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches apart, driven below top

elevation of edging.

B. Shovel-Cut Edging: Separate mulched areas from turf areas with a 45-degree, 4- to 6-inch-

deep, shovel-cut edge as indicated on Drawings.

3.12 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring

planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or

vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable

plantings.

B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and

pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use

of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off

foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.13 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to

authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate

applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before

each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover

areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat

already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 14

3.14 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by

construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.

2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved.

3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,

as determined by Architect.

B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy

condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction

operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced for each tree of 4 inches or

smaller in caliper size.

2. Provide two new tree(s) of 4-inch caliper size for each tree being replaced that measures

more than 4 inches in caliper size.

3. Species of Replacement Trees: Species selected by Architect.

3.15 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly

condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks,

or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and

debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and

trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace

damaged plantings.

D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie

tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order

and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.


A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of

landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance

immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and

well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.


ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 15

B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled

employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin

maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably

healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.



ONTARIO, OR.

PLANTS 329300 - 16



ONTARIO, OR

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 1

SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Excavating and back filling for utilities, finish grade, pipe bedding, and compaction of all fill

material(s).

B. Provide all related materials, equipment, and labor required to complete the Work as specified.


A. Facility Water Distribution: Section 221113

B. Facility Sanitary Sewers: Section 221313

C. Earth Moving: Section 312000

D. Storm Utility Drainage: Section 334100




1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit drawings or details indicating proposed alternate earthwork procedures or proposed

procedures not indicated in the Contract Documents.

C. Material Source: Submit the name of imported materials provider. Provide materials from

same source throughout work. Change of source requires Owner and/or Engineer approval.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 FILL

A. Approval from Owner and/or Engineer required.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Base: Well graded, clean, sound, durable particles of 3/4-inch minus, crushed rock or pit run

drain rock containing less than ten (10) percent passing the #200 sieve.

C. Pipe Bedding: Processed sand and gravel free from clay lumps, organic, or other deleterious

material complying with the following gradation requirements:

SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING

1 Inch 100

3/4-Inch 90 to 100

3/8-Inch 20 to 55

No. 4 0 to 10

No. 8 0 to 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, elevations, levels, contours, grades, and datum necessary to perform

earthwork operations as indicated on the drawings.

B. Verify that the survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated on the

Drawings.

C. Locate, identify, and protect existing utilities to remain that may be damaged by construction

operations.

1. Notify Engineer and Utility Company immediately of utilities not indicated on the

drawings.

2. Maintain all existing utilities in operating condition.

3. Repair any damage to utilities as directed by the Engineer or utility Owner.

D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or

displacement. Where markers are required to be removed, provide removal and reinstallation

by a licensed land surveyor, licensed in the State of Oregon, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate for utilities and all other work shown in the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Excavation for Utilities:

1. Excavate trench width and depth required for laying pipe, conduit, or cable. Cut trench

banks vertical. Remove stones from bottom of trench as required to avoid point-bearing.

Over excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered, from trench bottom as required to

provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding.

2. Trench Excavation Side Walls Greater than Five (5) Feet in Depth: Slope, shore, sheet,

brace or otherwise support by means of sufficient strength to protect construction

personnel within excavation in accordance with applicable rules and regulations


ONTARIO, OR


established for construction by local, state, and federal Occupational Safety and Health

regulations and by local ordinances.

3. Provide Lateral travel distance to excavation exit ladder or steps maximum twenty-five

(25) feet in trenches four (4) feet or deeper.

4. During excavation, stockpile materials suitable for backfilling away from trench bank to

prevent overloading, slides, or cave-ins.

5. Remove material encountered in trenching operations that is unsuitable for backfilling,

subgrade or foundation purposes as determined by Testing Laboratory and Engineer.

Dispose of materials off-site in an approved manner in accordance with requirements of

Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

6. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations by temporary

grading or other approved methods.

a. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.

b. Remove accumulated water in excavations.

c. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and

other dewatering system components required to remove water from excavations.

7. Open cut excavation using trenching machine or hoe. Do not use dirt clods for backfill

created by use of machines other than ladder or wheel-type trenching machines.

8. Grade trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on

bedding material along entire trench length, except where necessary to excavate the bell

holes, proper scaling of pipe joints, or other required connections. Dig bell holes and

depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Do not excavate trench

deeper, longer, or wider than required to make proper joint connection.

9. Excavate trench width below the top of pipe a minimum of eighteen (18) inches wide and

maximum of six (6) inches wider than outside surface of pipe or conduit installed to

elevations and grades indicated on Drawings. Excavate trench width for other pipe,

conduit, or cable to least practical width allowing for proper compaction of trench

backfill. Water, sewer, and storm trench widths shall be as indicated on Civil Drawings.

10. Excavate trench depth measured from finished grade or paved surface to the following

requirements or applicable codes and ordinances:

a. Water: 48 inches (4 feet) to top of pipe barrel.

b. Sanitary Sewer: Elevations and grades indicated on Drawings.

c. Storm Sewer: Depths, elevations, and grades indicated on Drawings.

11. Provide shoring, sheeting, and bracing, as required, in trenches and other excavations

where protection of construction personnel is required. Sheeting may be removed after

sufficient backfilling to protect against damaging or injurious caving.

12. Warning Tape: Warning tape, such as Terra Tape Extra Stretch 540 or approved equal,

shall he installed in the trench 6 to 8 inches below final grade (ground level). Install

marking tape continuously along total trench length. Tape shall be blue, red, and green in

color, six (6) inches wide and read "CAUTION WATER LINE BURIED BELOW", and

"CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW" respectively.

C. Excavation for Pavement:

1. Excavate roadway and pavement areas to line and grade indicated on Drawings.

2. Stockpile excavated material suitable for backfilling on-site.

3. Remove excavated materials not required or not suitable for backfill from site.


ONTARIO, OR


4. Over excavate areas of pavement subgrade found to contain unsuitable material. Prepare,

fill with suitable material, and compact as specified.

3.3 PIPE BEDDING

A. Pipe Bedding shall meet ISPWC for Type I Bedding.

B. Excavate Trenches, for water and sewer pipe or conduit to elevations indicated on Drawings,

four (4) inches below bottom of pipe and to width as specified. Place six (6) inches of bedding

material around the sides of the pipe, compact and shape to conform to lower portion of pipe

barrel. After pipe installation, backfill and compact to top of trench.

C. Place twelve (12) inches of 3/4-inch minus material over the water, sewer, and storm sewer

pipe or as indicated on the Civil Drawings.

D. Place geotextile fabric as indicated on Drawings for infiltration swales.

3.4 BACKFILLING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Backfilling:

1. Verify that imported off-site fill and stockpiled on-site fill is acceptable as per Owner

and/or Engineer.

B. Areas Exposed by Excavation or Stripping:

1. Proof roll to detect any areas of insufficient compaction by making a minimum of two (2)

complete passes with fully-loaded tandem-axle dump truck, or Engineer approved

equivalent, in each of two (2) perpendicular directions under supervision and direction of

Engineer.

2. Excavate and re-compact areas failing to meet specified requirements.

3. Compaction for water, sewer, and storm trenches shall be as indicated on Drawings.

C. Fill material Placement to follow the minimum requirements.

1. For Base Material 3/4-inch minus, place in eight (8) inch maximum lifts compacted to a

minimum ninety-five (95) percent optimum density in accordance with ASTM D 1557 at

minimum moisture content of one (1) percent below and maximum moisture content of

three (3) percent above optimum moisture content.

2. For pit run Material 3 inches minus, place in eight (8) inch maximum lifts compacted

with a vibratory roller. The roll pattern shall be established by the Engineer and observed

for compliance.

3.5 MAINTENANCE OF FINISH GRADE

A. Verify finished grades for conformance to the elevations indicated on the Drawings and for

specified conditions for subgrade.


ONTARIO, OR


B. Protect finish grade from excessive wheel loading during construction, including dump trucks

and concrete trucks.

C. Remove areas of finished grade found to have insufficient compaction density. Replace in a

manner that will comply with compaction requirements as directed by Engineer. Provide hard,

uniform, smooth, stable surface, true to grade and cross-section after completion of

compaction.

D. Careful construction procedures are critical to the successful finish grading operation if the

imported materials are wet and soft. Earthwork construction during winter and spring months

often requires special construction techniques that may affect timing. Consult the Engineer

prior to initiating wet weather construction.


A. Compaction:

1. Perform complete and thorough compaction of all fill, in a systematic pattern, to assure

complete and consistent work.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect building pad areas and building related earthwork from damage by construction

operations and erosion.

B. Prohibit vehicles from entering building subgrade pad area. Vehicles not permitted.

C. Scarify surface, reshape, and compact areas damaged by construction operations or weather

erosion.

D. Careful construction procedures are critical to the successful grading operation if the imported

materials are wet and soft. Earthwork construction during winter and spring months often

requires special construction techniques that may affect timing. Consult the Engineer prior to

initiating wet weather construction.



ONTARIO, OR




ONTARIO, OR

STORM UTILITIES DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 1

SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Gravity and force storm piping, underground structures, and specialties.


A. Common work results for utilities: Section 330500




1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufacture's certification that pipe, fittings, catch basins, manholes, and appurtenance











PART 2 PRODUCTS


ONTARIO, OR


2.1 PIPE


B. Storm Drain pipe with diameter of 4 inches to 15 inches shall be solid wall PVC pipe shall

conform to ASTM D 3034 or SDR 35. Gravity Sewer pipe with diameter of 18 inches to 36

inches shall be solid wall PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM F 679.

2.2 ACCESSORIES


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION









3.2 PREPARATIONS



backfilling.





mechanical joints.

3.3 BEDDING


ONTARIO, OR



on the section.




B. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600 and/or AWWA C605, ASTM C 12,

ASTM C14, manufacture's published instructions and local or state requirements.

C. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints or a specified


D. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new Work and




E. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 330500.







or ASTM C 361.



ONTARIO, OR



TVCC_CTE Project Manual 09.30.19 - BidNet

Documents

Transcript of TVCC_CTE Project Manual 09.30.19 - BidNet